DVD HOME THEATER SOUND SYSTEM
DVX-S100
DVX-S100: DVR-S100 + NX-S100S + NX-S100C + SW-S100
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
CAUTION
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended
by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive
force, and uneven surfaces may cause the
product and cart combination to overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or
rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the
manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into
the product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
CAUTION
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs
to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to
a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the
antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA
70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection
to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the
grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC
– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved
by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the
FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high
quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this
product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC
Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.
Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this
product in a residential environment will not result in
harmful interference with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,
if not installed and used according to the instructions
found in the users manual, may cause interference
harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee
that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and
“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one
of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as
practical.
CAUTION
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 10 cm on the top, 10 cm on the left and
right, and 10 cm at the back of DVR-S100, and 20 cm on the
top, 10 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm at the back of
SW-S100 — away from direct sunlight, heat sources,
vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,
motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To
prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where
it may get exposed to dripping or splashing, and never put
any objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the top of
the unit.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit in a place where foreign objects
and liquid might fall. It might cause a fire, damage to this
unit and/or personal injury. Do not place the following
objects on this unit:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause
electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord
from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid
drops inside this unit.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.
The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this
unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 220/240 V AC, 50 Hz.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as
long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit
itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In
this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the bottom of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide
slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-
003.
DANGER
Visible laser radiation when open. Avoid direct exposure to
beam.
When this unit is plugged to the wall outlet, do not place your
eyes close to the opening of the disc tray and other openings to
look into inside.
The laser component in this product is capable of emitting
radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1.
The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit.
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
1
English
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FEATURES .......................................................................... 2
CHECKING THE ACCESSORIES ................................... 3
INSTALLING BATTERIES IN THE REMOTE
CONTROL ........................................................................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................................... 4
Front panel ......................................................................... 4
Remote control (AMP mode) ............................................ 6
Front panel display (left) ................................................... 8
Front panel display (right) ................................................. 9
PREPARATION
PREPARATION STEPS ................................................... 10
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................................. 11
Speaker placement ........................................................... 11
Installing the speakers ..................................................... 12
CONNECTIONS ................................................................ 14
Connecting TV and audio/video components ................. 14
Connecting the antennas .................................................. 16
Connecting the speakers .................................................. 17
Connecting to an external amplifier ................................ 19
Connecting the AC power cord ........................................ 19
Turning on the power ....................................................... 19
ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ................ 20
Using the test tone ........................................................... 20
USING BASIC FUNCTIONS
BASIC PLAYBACK .......................................................... 21
Basic operations ............................................................... 21
Selecting a sound field program ...................................... 23
RECORDING .................................................................... 28
PLAYING A DISC
DISC INFORMATION ..................................................... 29
Types of disc that this unit can play ................................ 29
Region management information .................................... 29
Notes about handling discs .............................................. 29
MP3 playback .................................................................. 30
REMOTE CONTROL (DVD MODE) ............................. 31
PLAYING A DISC ............................................................. 32
Basic operation ................................................................ 32
ON-SCREEN MENU ......................................................... 34
Operating menu bar ......................................................... 34
Icons for disc menu ......................................................... 35
Icons for player menu ...................................................... 36
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS .................................. 38
Using a disc’s menu ......................................................... 38
Enhancing video quality
[U.S.A. and Canada models only] ................................... 38
DVD-Audio features ........................................................ 39
Enhancing audio quality (DISC DIRECT) ...................... 40
Switching audio tracks, subtitles and angles ................... 41
All group play .................................................................. 42
Programmed play ............................................................. 42
Random play .................................................................... 43
Bookmarks ....................................................................... 44
Repeat play ...................................................................... 45
Repeat A-B ...................................................................... 46
SETUP MENU ................................................................... 47
Operating the setup menu ................................................ 47
Summary of settings ........................................................ 48
Ratings ............................................................................. 51
PCM down conversion ..................................................... 51
Speaker settings ............................................................... 52
TUNING
TUNING ............................................................................. 54
Automatic and manual tuning ......................................... 54
Presetting stations ............................................................ 55
Tuning in to a preset station ............................................. 56
Exchanging preset stations .............................................. 56
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
OPERATING OTHER COMPONENTS USING THE
REMOTE CONTROL ....................................................... 57
Setting the manufacturer code ......................................... 57
ADJUSTMENTS
SET MENU ......................................................................... 59
List of SET MENU items ................................................ 59
Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .......................... 59
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .................... 60
2 LFE LEVEL ................................................................ 61
3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ........................... 62
4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ....................................... 62
5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the front left and right
speakers) ...................................................................... 62
6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ................ 62
7 I/O ASSIGN (input assignment) ................................. 63
8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ............................ 63
9 SP/PRE OUT (output source settings) ......................... 63
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT
SPEAKERS ........................................................................ 64
CHANGING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR DSP
PROGRAMS ...................................................................... 65
Adjusting the delay time .................................................. 65
Adjusting the parameter settings for PRO LOGIC II
Music ............................................................................... 66
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................... 67
GLOSSARY ....................................................................... 72
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 75
2
FEATURES
The DVX-S100 is the Home Theater Sound System that delivers a powerful and realistic sound experience like that
found in a movie theater just by combining the unit with the TV.
The newest DSP programs will enhance the power and realism of various sources, from movies to concerts, and
sporting events. Also, the Silent Cinema program allows you to enjoy the sound field even through the headphones.
Since the DVX-S100 consists of a DVD Audio/Video receiver, a center speaker, front speakers, rear speakers and a
subwoofer, you can enjoy stronger bass and surround effects as well as a good balance throughout the speakers.
Moreover, the One-touch connection of the speaker connectors designed exclusively for this unit allows you to easily
connect the speakers.
◆ Built-in 5-channel power amplifier
◆ DVD-AUDIO/VIDEO, CD, VCD, MP3, CD-R/
RW playback
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1
decoder
◆ DTS/DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder
◆ Sophisticated FM/AM tuner
◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
or DTS
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP
◆ Easy connection of the center speaker, front
speakers and rear speakers using special speaker
connectors designed exclusively for this unit
◆ Multi-function remote control which can also be
used for other audio/video components of certain
manufacturers
■ About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using the buttons
on either the main unit or the remote control. In this
case, the operations performed by using the remote
control are described in this manual.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part for the
reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and
others. In this case, the product has priority.
• Some of the illustrations and names of the package
contents etc written in this manual may differ from the
actual products and the names written on the package
etc.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
“DCDi” is a trademark of Faroudja, a division of Sage
Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of certain
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use
of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
3
INTRODUCTION
English
CHECKING THE ACCESSORIES
Check your package to make sure it contains the following items.
DVR-S100
Remote control
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
CH
PRESET
CH
Batteries (x2)
(AA, R06, UM-3)
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada and
General models)
(Europe, U.K. and
Australia models)
NX-SW100 (NX-S100S x4, NX-S100C, SW-S100)
Fasteners (4 sets)
for the center
speaker
Pads
(2 sets: 16 pieces)
Speaker cables
(for the rear speakers: 15m (x2),
for the front/center speaker:
5m (x3))
System connector
cable (5m x 1)
INSTALLING BATTERIES IN THE REMOTE CONTROL
Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the
+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings
(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.
1 Press the part and slide off the battery
compartment cover.
2 Insert the two batteries (AA, R06, UM-3 type)
with + and – oriented properly.
3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into
place.
1
3
2
■ Notes on batteries
• Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in
the operating range of the remote control.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline
and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging
carefully as these different types of batteries may have
the same shape and color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them
immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or
letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the
battery compartment thoroughly before installing new
batteries.
Preserving the manufacturer code
Replace batteries early before they become unusable.
The manufacturer code set by the user will be
preserved for about two minutes when batteries run
out or when they are removed. Note that the
manufacturer code setting may be lost if more than
two minutes elapses. Also, if you press any button on
the remote control accidentally while replacing
batteries, the manufacturer code will be lost.
Non-skid pads
(2 sets: 16 pieces)
Video pin cable
103_S100_01-09_EN 02.5.13, 1:26 PM3
4
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
STANDBY/ON
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY
PROGRESSIVE
AUTO/MAN’L
DISC DIRECT
SILENT
12 3456890qwer
y
t
7
u
MEMORY
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When
you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will
be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared-signals from the
remote control.
2 Disc tray
The disc you play is loaded on this tray.
3 v
Press to open and close the disc tray.
4 w
Press to start playback.
5 a (A/B/C/D/E)
(DVD mode)
Press to stop playback.
(Tuner mode)
Selects preset station groups A to E.
6 d (PRESET/BAND)
(DVD mode)
Press to pause.
(Tuner mode)
Switches the reception band between FM and AM and
also the mode between the tuning mode and the preset
mode.
7 t/e, r/y (d PRESET/TUNING /
PRESET/TUNING u)
(DVD mode)
Each time these buttons are pressed, the disc begins
playing from the beginning of the track you select. When
you keep pressing the buttons, the disc searches forward
or backward.
(Tuner mode)
Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not
appear.
8 PROGRESSIVE (MEMORY) (U.S.A. and
Canada models)
(DVD mode)
Switches between progressive video output and interlace
video output.
(Tuner mode)
Stores the current station in the memory.
MEMORY (U.K., Europe, Australia and
General models)
(Tuner mode)
Stores the current station in the memory.
9 DISC DIRECT (AUTO/MAN’L)
(DVD mode)
Changes the modes of DISC DIRECT function.
(Tuner mode)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.
(U.K., Europe, Australia and General models)
5
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
English
0 INPUT H/G
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
q INPUT MODE
Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,
DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is
connected to two or more input jacks.
w DSP H/G
Selects the DSP program.
e STEREO
Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect
reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel
signals are directed to the front left and right speakers
without effect sounds.
r VOLUME +/–
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the recording (Rec) level.
t Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
y Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
u
SILENT
Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the speakers.
6
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Remote control (AMP mode)
This section explains the function of each button on the
remote control when you operate this unit as an amplifier,
not as a tuner or a DVD player. Make sure that the AMP
mode is selected before starting operation.
Refer to “REMOTE CONTROL (DVD MODE)” on page
31 for the details about the functions of the remote
control when you control this unit in the DVD mode.
Also, refer to “OPERATING OTHER COMPONENTS
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL” on pages 57 and 58
for the details about its functions when controlling other
components connected to this unit.
y
• The buttons on the remote control whose names are written in
purple are operation buttons when you operate this unit in the
AMP mode.
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
CH
PRESET
CH
1
3
4
5
6
7
t
r
e
w
q
0
9
8
2
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 Basic operation buttons
Used to operate the components selected with input
selector buttons.
3 CODE SET
Used when setting up the manufacturer code.
4 DSP program buttons
Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a
button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that
group.
5 LEVEL
Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted.
6 Cursor buttons (j, i, u, d)/ENTER
Select SET MENU items and change the settings on the
SETUP menu etc.
7 TEST
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
8 SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
9 POWER (
)
Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode.
0 Input selector buttons/AMP
Select the input source and set the remote control to
operate the selected source component. Sets the remote
control to the AMP mode for controlling this unit.
q STEREO
Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect
reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel
signals are directed to the front left and right speakers
without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS
signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the
front left and right speakers.
w MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output
to the previous volume level.
e SET MENU
Selects the SET MENU mode.
r VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
t B. BOOST
Turns BASS BOOST function on or off.
7
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
English
■ Using the remote control
30° 30°
Approximately 6 m (20 feet)
Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,
stove or bath;
– dusty places; or
– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.
8
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel display (left)
This front panel display mainly displays the information related to the playback of discs.
PGM RND
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP D.MIX P.PCM MLT.CH
AB
–
DVD V CD
VIDEO
AUDIO
888888888888
1
2345
7
68 9
1 Play mode indicators
PGM: Programmed play / RND: Random play /
: Repeat play / A-B : Repeat A-B
2 Mode type indicators
GROUP: Group mode / TITLE: Title mode /
TRACK: Track mode / CHAP: Chapter mode
3 D.MIX (Down Mix)
Lights up when the currently playing multi-channel audio
track is mixed down into 2-channel.
4 P.PCM (Packed PCM)
Lights up while a P.PCM signal is input.
5 MLT.CH (Multi Channel)
Lights up while a multi-channel signal is output.
6 Disc type indicators
Indicates the type of disc. For example, DVD and AUDIO
lights up when playing a DVD-Audio disc.
7 w
Lights up during playback. Blinks while resume function
is working.
8 d
Lights up while playback is paused.
9 Multi-information display (left)
Shows various information such as title, chapter or track
number, elapsed playing time etc.
9
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
English
Front panel display (right)
88888888888888
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
SILENT
MOVIE THTR DTS
DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC
12
ENTERTAINMENT
DVD/CD VIDEO 1VIDEO 2 VCR
MD/CD–R TUNER
STEREO
AUTO
TUNED
PS PTY RT CT
PTY HOLD
MEMORY
SLEEP
MUTE
dB
ms
SP
PRE
B. BOOST
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
/
DSP
PCM
L
LFE
C R
RL RC RR
12345
6
7890
o
iuytewq
r
(U.K. and Europe models only)
1 Decoder indicators
Lights up when the t, g,
PRO LOGIC
/
or
MATRIX are activated.
2 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up in the virtual cinema DSP mode.
3 Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
4 SP/PRE indicator
The indicator of the item selected in “9 SP/PRE OUT” on
the SET MENU lights up. (But it does not light up when
headphones are connected.)
5 SILENT indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected while the
digital sound field processor is on.
6 Input source indicator
Shows the current input source with a cursor.
7 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.
8 AUTO indicator
Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
9 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station.
0 MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show a station can be stored.
q DSP indicator
Lights up when you select DSP programs.
w v indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
e B. BOOST indicator
Lights up when BASS BOOST is ON. (But it does not
light up when headphones are connected.)
r DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program lights up when
the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE
THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is
selected.
t Multi-information display (right)
Shows the current DSP program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
y SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
u MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
i Input channel indicator
Indicates the channel components of input signals being
received.
o RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models)
The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently
received RDS station light(s) up.
PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
10
PREPARATION STEPS
In order to enjoy sound and video images with this sound
system, follow the procedures as described below. See
each page for details.
Installing batteries in the remote control (P.3)
Speaker setup (P.11)
• Speaker placement (P.11)
• Installing the speakers (P.12)
Connections (P.14 – 19)
• Connecting TV and audio/video components (P.14)
• Connecting the antennas (P.16)
• Connecting the speakers (P.17)
• Connecting the AC power cord (P.19)
• Turning on the power (P.19)
Adjusting speaker output levels (P.20)
Before connecting components
• Do not connect this unit or other components to the
mains power until all connections between the
components have been completed.
• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to
say, L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to
“–”. Some components require different connection
methods and have different jack names. Refer to the
operation instructions for each component to be
connected to this unit.
• Insert the plugs properly. The speakers may not output
any sound or may output noise if they are not inserted
properly.
• The name of jack corresponds to input selector.
• The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE
plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are
220/240 V AC, 50 Hz. (General model)
After connecting components
• Check them again to make sure they are correct.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
240V 220V
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model)
11
PREPARATION
English
SPEAKER SETUP
This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-
field quality with a 5-speaker system, using front left and
right speakers, rear left and right speakers and a center
speaker.
The front speakers are used for the main source sound
plus effect sounds. The rear speakers are used for effect
and surround sounds. The center speaker is for the center
sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.).
Notes
• If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear and/or center),
change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU
(p.60) to designate the signals to other terminals you connect
speakers to.
• If you use speakers (with different tonal qualities) instead of
the included speakers, the tone of a moving human voice and
other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend
that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers
with the same tonal quality.
Speaker placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
Front speakers
Place the front left and right speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance between
each speaker and each side of the video monitor should
also be the same.
Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front
face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to
the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the
monitor) and centrally between the front speakers.
Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position,
facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the
floor.
Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
Note
• Although the speaker system in this unit is magnetically
shielded, it may still affect the color on the television monitor
when using this unit near the television. Adjust the relative
positions of this unit and the television if this happens.
Center speaker Front speaker (R)
Rear speaker (R)
Front speaker (L)
1.8 m (6 feet)
Subwoofer
Rear speaker (L)
12
SPEAKER SETUP
Installing the speakers
■ Placing the center speaker
Place the speaker on TV whose top is flat or on the floor
under the TV or inside the TV rack so that it is stabilized.
When placing the speaker on top of the TV, to prevent the
speaker from falling down, put the provided fasteners at
four points on the bottom of the speaker and the top of the
TV.
Cautions
• Do not place the speaker on top of the TV whose area is
smaller than the bottom area of the speaker. If placed, the
speaker may drop out causing an injury to you.
• Do not place the speaker on top of the TV with an inclination.
• Do not touch the adhesive surface after peeling off the seal as
this will weaken its adhesive strength.
• Thoroughly wipe clean the surface where the fastener is to be
applied. Note that adhesive strength is weakened if the surface
is dirty, oily or wet and that this may cause the center speaker
to drop.
■ Placing the front and rear
speakers
When placing the front and rear speakers on a flat
surface, attach the included non-skid pads to the corners
on the bottom of the speakers as shown below. This
prevents the speakers from sliding around.
Peel off the
seal
Fastener
■ Mounting the front and rear
speakers
When mounting the front and rear speakers on a wall, use
the holes on the speakers’ back panels.
1 Put the provided pads at the four corners on
the rear of the front and rear speakers to
prevent the front and rear speakers from
moving by vibrations.
2 Fasten screws into a firm wall or wall
support as shown below.
Diam. 3.5 to 4 mm
Min.
20 mm
6 mm
Tapping screw
(Available at the
hardware store)
Non-skid pads
13
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
English
3 Hang the holes on the protruding screws.
• Make sure that the screws are securely caught by
the narrow parts of the holes.
• You can use the lower holes on the rear of the
front/rear speakers.
Cautions
• Each speaker weighs 1.1 kg (2 lbs. 6 oz.). Do not mount them
on thin plywood or a wall with soft surface material. If
mounted, the screws may come out of the flimsy surface and
the speakers may fall. This damages the speakers or causes
personal injury.
• Do not install the speakers to a wall with nails, adhesives, or
any other unstable hardware. Long-term use and vibrations
may cause them to fall.
• To avoid accidents resulting from tripping over loose speaker
cables, fix them to the wall.
• Select a proper position on the wall to mount the speaker so
that no one will injure his/her head or face.
60 mm
60 mm
■ If you want to mount a speaker
on a commercially available
speaker stand (for the front/rear
speakers)
The screw holes (at an interval of 60 mm) on the bottom
and the rear of the speaker can be used to mount the
speaker on a speaker stand.
* Those screw holes can be used with M4 screws only.
60 mm
Front/rear speaker
(bottom)
60 mm
Front/rear speaker
(rear)
14
CONNECTIONS
Connecting TV and audio/video
components
■ Types of video jacks
1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks (U.S.A., Canada,
Australia and General models)
Transmit color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) and luminance
separately and provide the best quality picture.
2 VIDEO jack
Conventional composite video signal.
3 S VIDEO jack
Transmits color and luminance separately and achieves
high-quality color reproduction.
Notes
• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input
through the composite video and S video jacks are only output
through the corresponding composite video and S video jacks.
• When you connect this unit to a video monitor, a video
component and a recording component, connect the same types
of jack, for example, the video jack on this unit to the video
jack on the video component.
• The description of the component video jacks may differ
depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y,
R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer also to the operation
instructions for the component being connected.
• Do not connect this unit to a video monitor through a video
cassette recorder. If you do so, the picture may not be played
back properly due to the copyright protection technology
incorporated in this unit.
• When progressive output (p.38) is selected in the DVD mode,
video signals are only output from the component video jacks.
321
PR PB Y
■ Types of audio jacks
1 COAXIAL jack
Connects a coaxial pin cable and provides the better
quality sound than analog audio jacks.
2 OPTICAL jack
Connects an optical fiber cable and provides the better
quality sound than analog audio jacks.
3 Analog audio jacks
Connect an audio pin cable.
y
• 1 and 2 are digital jacks.
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams.
• All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling
digital signals.
Notes
• Digital output jack and analog OUT (Rec) jacks are
independent. Only digital signals are output from digital output
jack and analog signals from OUT (Rec) jacks.
• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.
If you use an optical cable that does not conform to this
standard, this unit may not function properly.
• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,
keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is
off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
Anti-dust cap
Remove the cap covering the OPTICAL jacks when
connecting an optical cable. Safely store the cap and
always re-insert it in the terminal when the terminal is not
in use. (This cap prevents the entrance of dust.)
1 23
L
R
Anti-dust cap
104_S100_10-20_EN 02.5.13, 1:27 PM14
15
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
■ The connection example
Use a cable specified for connecting each type of jacks.
(The included video pin cable is used for connecting this unit to a video monitor.)
The connection example shown below is just an example. Connect in accordance with the components you have.
y
• The solid lines indicate the output from this unit and the dotted lines indicate the input to this unit.
For Audio component
Audio pin cable
Coaxial cable
Optical cable
For A/V component
Audio/Video cable
For Video Component
Video pin cable (included)
S Video cable
Component video cable
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General
models)
FM ANT
75ΩUNBAL.
GND – AM ANT
P
R
P
B
Y
L
IN
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2
VIDEO
VCR
IN IN
IN IN IN
OUT OUT
IN IN IN INOUT OUT
OUT OUT
S VIDEO
MONITOR
MD/CD-R FRONT CENTER
SYSTEM
MONITOR
6CH PREOUT
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 VCR
REAR
SUBWOOFER
R
MD/CD-R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
CONNECTOR
MARK
TO SW-S100
[
B
]
[
A
]
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
IN
MD/CD-R VIDEO 1
DIGITAL
ANALOG
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
R
INPUT
OPTICAL
AUDIO
L
R
OUTPUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
L
R
P
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
Y
S Video cable
Video pin cable (included)
Component video cable
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General
models)
Video monitor
S Video cable
Audio/Video
cable
VCR
S Video cable
Audio/Video cable
(U.S.A. model)
Coaxial cable
Audio pin cable
Optical cable
CD recorder or MD recorder
Audio pin cable
S Video cable
Optical cable
Audio/Video cable
TV/digital TV/cable TV
104_S100_10-20_EN 02.5.13, 1:28 PM15
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength.
Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals.
■ Connecting indoor FM antenna
Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT
terminal.
75ΩUNBAL.
FM ANT GND – AM ANT
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and
minimum interference, connect
the antenna GND terminal to a
good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
AM loop antenna
(included)
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and
GND terminals.
3 Release the tab. (The tab will return to its
original position when you release your
finger.)
Once connected, pull the wires gently to check that
they are connected securely.
4 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.
y
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the
outdoor antennas.
Notes
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
Bare wire
Tab
17
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Connecting the speakers
Connect the included speakers to the DVD AUDIO/VIDEO receiver (DVR-S100) using the included speaker cables and
system connector cables as shown below.
L
IN
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2
VIDEO
VCR
IN IN
IN IN IN
OUT OUT
IN IN IN INOUT OUT
OUT OUT
S VIDEO
MONITOR
ANALOG
MD/CD-R FRONT CENTER
SYSTEM
MONITOR
6CH PREOUT
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 VCR
REAR
SUBWOOFER
[
B
]
[
A
]
R
COAXIAL
IN
MD/CD-R
FM ANT
75ΩUNBAL.
GND – AM ANT
MD/CD-RVIDEO 1
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
IN
OPTICAL
OUT
CONNECTOR
MARK
TO SW-S100
MARK
REAR
CENTERFRONT FRONT
(GREEN)
(WHITE)
(BLUE)
(SURROUND)
DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO
SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX-S100C
AND NX-S100S.
(GRAY)
(RED)
R L
L
R
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR
TO DVR-S100
SPEAKERS
CENTER
REAR L
REAR R
*1
*1
FRONT R
FRONT L
DVD Audio/Video receiver (DVR-S100)
As this terminal is used for testing at the
factory, do not connect any equipment to this
terminal.
*1 Insert the plug with its mark facing up.
System connector cable
Front speaker (R)
(NX-S100S)
Front speaker (L)
(NX-S100S)
(RED) (WHITE)
Speaker cable (RED)
Speaker cable (WHITE)
Speaker cable (GREEN)
Speaker cable (BLUE)
Speaker cable (GRAY)
Center speaker (NX-S100C)
(GREEN)
(GRAY) (BLUE)
Subwoofer (SW-S100)
Rear speaker (R)
(NX-S100S)
Rear speaker (L)
(NX-S100S)
18
CONNECTIONS
y
• The connector of the included speaker cable and the terminal of
the subwoofer are classified by color. Connect the same colors.
• The label of the speaker is attached to each speaker cable.
Connect the speakers in accordance with the labels.
• Connect the color tube of the speaker cable to the plus (+) side
of each speaker. If the polarity of the speaker connections is
incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.
• A cover is attached to the end of the speaker cable. Connect the
speakers after removing the cover.
• Make sure that the plugs of the system connector cable and the
connectors of the speaker cables are inserted correctly before
inserting them.
Notes
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal
part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the
speakers.
• Do not insert the plug or connector forcibly. Doing so may
damage the plug, connector or terminal.
• Do not scratch, forcibly bend, or pull the system connector or
speaker cable as this may damage the cable, causing loss of
audio output, and may possibly result in a fire or electric shock.
Take particular care in making sure that the cable is not
squashed by a rack or caster.
• Before disconnecting or connecting the system connector
cable, disconnect the power supply cord of the subwoofer and
DVD audio/video receiver.
(RED)
(RED)
Color tube
(RED)
Color tube
(BLUE)
(BLUE)
Connector
(BLUE)
The back of the
Subwoofer
Connector
■ Using commercially available
speakers and speaker cables
You can use commercially available speaker cables and
speakers except for a subwoofer. If you use them, note the
following.
• Use the speaker whose impedance is 6Ω or higher.
When using the speaker whose impedance is lower than
6Ω, the protection circuit may start working or this unit
may be damaged.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
• Use the speaker cable that is as thick as the included
cable. Too thick cables cannot be used.
Exchanging the speaker cables
1 Remove approximately 15 mm (9/16”) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to
prevent short circuits.
2 Open the tab.
3 Pull the inserted bare wire of the speaker
cable from the connector and insert the bare
wire of the commercially available speaker
cable.
4 Return the tab to secure the wire.
2
3
1
4
15 mm
Tab
19
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Connecting to an external
amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the 6CH PREOUT jacks as follows.
Note
• When you have connected this unit to an external amplifier,
select PRE in “9 SP/PRE OUT” on the SET MENU. (See page
63.)
1 FRONT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 REAR jacks
Rear channel line output jacks.
3 CENTER jack
Center channel line output jack.
4 SUBWOOFER jack
Low bass signals distributed from the front, center and/or
rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned
to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.)
The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when
Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they
are assigned to this jack.
y
• The adjustments made in the following settings have an effect
on the signals output from the 6CH PREOUT jacks.
– BASS BOOST settings
– Speaker settings
– DSP programs
FRONT CENTER
6CH PREOUT
REAR
SUBWOOFER
1
2
3
4
Connecting the AC power cord
Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.
■ Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost when the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the unit is turned off for more
than one week, the stored setting will be cleared. If so, set
the setting again.
• Volume level
• Input source
• Speaker output level (center, rear L/R and subwoofer)
• Sleep timer
• Parameter
• Delay time
• Set menu
• Disc direct
• Preset station
Turning on the power
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (POWER ( ) on the
remote control) to turn on the power of this
unit.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Note
• When you use only some of the included 6 speakers or when
using commercially available speakers, adjust speaker mode
settings soon after turning the power on. See “1 SPEAKER
SET (speaker mode settings)” on page 60 for details.
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
3
ROCK
4
ENTERTAINMENT
DVD
CD
AMP
POWER ( )
20
ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels
using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is
complete, the output level heard at the listening position
should be the same from each speaker. This is important
for best performance of the digital sound field processor,
and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro
Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS).
Note
• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from
the SILENT jack when using the test tone.
Using the test tone
Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the
speakers.
Note
• The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at
your listening position using the remote control.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press TEST to output the test tone.
3 Press VOL +/– to adjust the volume of this
unit so you can hear the test tone.
The test tone is heard (in order) from the LEFT
(front left speaker), CENTER (center speaker),
RIGHT (front right speaker), R SUR. (rear right
speaker), L SUR. (rear left speaker), and the
SUBWOOFER (subwoofer). The tone is produced
for about 2 seconds from each speaker.
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
PRESET
CHCH
AMP
VOL + / –
TEST
j, i
(U.S.A. model)
4 Adjust the level of the effect speakers using
j/ i so that it matches the level of the front
speakers.
While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the
selected speaker.
Note
• To adjust the level of the front speakers, use VOL +/– on
the remote control.
5 When adjustment is complete, press TEST to
stop the test tone.
y
• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are
set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy
listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume
simply by pressing VOL +/– on the remote control.
• If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, and
rear right) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the
front speakers, set “1E F. Level” on SET MENU to –10 dB (see
page 61). This setting decreases the front speaker output level
to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E F.
Level” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the
center and rear speakers again.
Notes
• If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON and the
center speaker is not connected, the center channel sound is
automatically output from the front left and right speakers.
• If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the
output level of the rear left and right speakers cannot be
adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the
rear right and left speakers.
• If “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to FRONT, the test
tone will be circulated skipping the subwoofer.
L SUR. R SUR.
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
SUBWOOFER
21
USING BASIC FUNCTIONS
English
BASIC PLAYBACK
Basic operations
You can play the software loaded on the audio and video
components connected to this unit.
Indication on the front panel display (example):
1 Press POWER ( ) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the A/V component connected to
this unit.
3 Press INPUT H/G on the front panel
repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons
on the remote control) to select the input
source.
The selected input source name and input mode
appear on the front panel display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the
component.
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
CH
PRESET
CH
POWER ( )
MUTE
B.BOOST
SLEEP
VOL + / –
Input selector
buttons
DSP program
buttons
VIDEO 1 AUTO
VIDEO 1
SP
Selected input source Input mode
5 Adjust the volume to the desired level.
The volume level is displayed digitally.
Example: –70 dB
Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to
0 dB (maximum)
Note
• If you have connected a recording component to the VCR
OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or
low volume during playback of other components, try turning
the recording component on.
■ Enhancing the bass tones
Press B. BOOST.
•“Bass Boost ON” appears in the display.
• This function enhances the bass tones of the
subwoofer by increasing the level of the low-range
frequencies.
• To cancel B. BOOST mode, press B. BOOST
again.
y
• The B. BOOST mode does not function when the headphones
are connected.
Note
• If a thudding noise is heard from the subwoofer when this
function is turned on, lower the subwoofer level. Otherwise, the
subwoofer may be damaged due to an excessive input level of
low-bass signal.
■ To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
To resume the audio output, press MUTE again.
y
• You can also cancel mute by pressing VOL +/–, etc.
• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front
panel display.
(U.S.A. model)
22
BASIC PLAYBACK
■ When you have finished using
this unit
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (POWER ( )
on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby
mode.
■ Setting the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The
sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source.
y
• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you
can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions
of the timer.
(While playing a source)
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of
time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel
display soon after the sleep timer has been set.
The display then returns to the previous indication.
Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”
appears on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the
“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns
to the previous indication.
y
• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit
in the standby mode by using POWER ( ) on the remote
control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by
disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet.
■ Input modes and indications
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can
select the type of input signals you desire.
Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you
have pressed to select the input source on the remote
control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown
on the front panel display.
• AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected
automatically as follows:
1)Digital signal
2)Analog signal
• DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal
encoded with DTS is selected.
• ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is
selected.
y
• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
setting.
• Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is
set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on the SET MENU
(see page 63 for details).
Notes
• When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on
some LD players, the sound output delays for a moment when
playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is
selected again.
• When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded,
the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case,
set the input mode to ANALOG.
Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs
• If the digital output data of the player has been
processed in any way, you may not be able to perform
DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection
between this unit and the player.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set
the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may reproduce
the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case,
connect the source to a digital input jack and set the
input mode to AUTO or DTS.
• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit
reproduces no sound.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with
the input mode set to AUTO;
– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-
decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after
having detected the DTS signal. When playback of
the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator
may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS
source can be played. If you want to play a normal
PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.
– When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or
skip operation is performed during playback of a
DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this
status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit
will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”
mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”
indicator will turn off.
23
BASIC PLAYBACK
English
USING BASIC FUNCTIONS
Selecting a sound field program
This unit’s built-in DSP (Digital Sound field Processor) can simulate various acoustic environments, including a concert
hall and movie theater, with its 9 sound field programs. For the best results, choose a program appropriate for the
selected audio source.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on
the remote control to select the desired
program.
3 After selecting the desired program, press
the same button repeatedly to select the
desired sub-program if available.
y
• You can also select DSP program by pressing DSP H/G on the
front panel.
• Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of
the name and description given for it below.
Indication on the front panel display (example):
Program name
Sub-program name
■ Feature of DSP programs
No.
1
2
3
4
Program
CONCERT HALL
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT
ENTERTAINMENT/
Disco
ENTERTAINMENT/
5ch Stereo
Features
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions
emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your
virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.
This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that
seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound.
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at
LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The
sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate”
sound.
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for
background music at parties, etc.
Hi-Fi DSP (for music sources)
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
CH CH
PRESET
AMP
STEREO
MATRIX6.1
d
SELECT
/DTS
DSP program
buttons
(U.S.A. model)
70mm Spectacle
MOVIE THTR
1
DVD/CD
SP
24
BASIC PLAYBACK
No.
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
Program
ENTERTAINMENT/
Game
ENTERTAINMENT/
Concert Video
TV SPORTS
MONO MOVIE
MOVIE THEATER 1/
Spectacle
MOVIE THEATER 1/
Sci-Fi
MOVIE THEATER 2/
Adventure
MOVIE THEATER 2/
General
q/DTS/ENHANCED
q/DTS/NORMAL
Features
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual
jazz or rock concert.
With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows,
music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is
oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the
surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence
sound field.
This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely
reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real.
This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
(especially large-scale movie productions).
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science
fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can
enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby
Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and
multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie
theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.
This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is
characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow.
It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations
without losing clarity.
This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters.
Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Pro Logic II decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding
and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound
orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the
back to the left and right, and toward the screen.
The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly
efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound
positioning smoother and more precise.
In this program, no DSP effect is applied.
CINEMA-DSP
(for video sources)
CINEMA-DSP
(for cinema sources)
STRAIGHT
DECODE
y
• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when
you turn on the power again.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source.
• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode.
Notes
• There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format and not
all sub-programs can be used with all input signal formats.
• The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect
created by the program.
• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC II Movie, no sound
will be heard from the front speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on
the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the front speakers.)
25
BASIC PLAYBACK
English
USING BASIC FUNCTIONS
■ Table of Program Names for Each Input Format
This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal
format.
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
DOLBY
DIGITAL
DTS DIGITAL
SUR
PRO LOGIC
PRO LOGIC II
2 channel
ANALOG, PCM,
DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS
70 mm Spectacle
70 mm Sci-Fi
70 mm Adventure
70 mm General
—
—
—
—
Normal
Enhanced
Movie
Music
DOLBY DIGITAL
DGTL Spectacle
DGTL Sci-Fi
DGTL Adventure
DGTL General
Normal
Enhanced
—
—
—
—
—
—
DTS
DTS Spectacle
DTS Sci-Fi
DTS Adventure
DTS General
—
—
Normal
Enhanced
—
—
—
—
DTS
+ Matrix 6.1
Spectacle 6.1
Sci-Fi 6.1
Adventure 6.1
General 6.1
—
—
Matrix 6.1
Enhanced 6.1
—
—
—
—
6.1 channel *
Input
Program
DOLBY DIGITAL
+ Matrix 6.1
Spectacle 6.1
Sci-Fi 6.1
Adventure 6.1
General 6.1
Matrix 6.1
Enhanced 6.1
—
—
—
—
—
—
No.
7
8
9
5.1 channel
* means the Matrix 6.1 decoder is ON.
y
• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the MATRIX 6.1 button on
the remote control, the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP
program is selected.
• MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the virtual rear center
speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.
• When playing a 6.1 channel source with MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control turned off, the program name changes to the
corresponding name for 5.1 channel.
26
BASIC PLAYBACK
■ Selecting PRO LOGIC II
You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five
discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC II in program
No. 9.
(While playing a 2-channel source)
1 Press AMP.
2 Press q/DTS.
The previously selected sub program appears on the
front panel display.
3 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the
decoder, PRO LOGIC II.
4 After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC
II), select the mode appropriate for the
source by pressing q/DTS.
The selection switches as follows;
PRO LOGIC II Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC II Music
y
• You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II Movie, and PRO
LOGIC II Music by pressing DSP H/G on the front panel
repeatedly.
Note
• Playback using DOLBY PRO LOGIC II decoders is possible
only for 2-channel signals.
■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround
EX or DTS ES software
Press MATRIX 6.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital + Matrix
6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder.
The rear center channel is created from rear left and right
channels, and output from virtual rear center speaker.
The display changes AUTO ^ Matrix6.1 ^ OFF each
time the MATRIX 6.1 button is pressed.
• AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby
Digital + Matrix 6.1 and DTS + Matrix 6.1
depending on the signal. Virtual rear center
speaker does not work for 5.1 channel
sources.
• Matrix6.1: This setting produces 6-channel playback
of the input source using the Matrix 6.1
decoder. The virtual rear center speaker can
be used when playing a 5.1-channel source.
• OFF: Virtual rear center speaker does not work in
this setting.
y
• When the Matrix 6.1 decoder is functioning, the “MATRIX”
indicator lights up on the front panel display.
Notes
• Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not
contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the
Matrix 6.1 decoding mode. To turn on the Matrix 6.1 decoder
when playing such a source, select “Matrix6.1”.
• Playing a 6.1-channel source is not possible even if
MATRIX6.1 is pressed in the following cases:
– when “1C REAR LR” in the SET MENU is set to NON;
– when the sound effect is turned off;
– when headphones are connected;
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played;
– when 5ch Stereo is selected.
• The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby
mode.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP
programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers
to reproduce a natural sound field.
You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C
REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field
processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP
automatically.
y
• When virtual CINEMA DSP is functioning, the “VIRTUAL”
indicator lights up on the front panel display.
Note
• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
“1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases:
– when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic
Normal, Pro Logic II, or DTS Normal program is selected;
– when the sound effect is turned off;
– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;
– when using the test tone; or
– when connecting the headphones.
27
BASIC PLAYBACK
English
USING BASIC FUNCTIONS
■ SILENT CINEMA DSP
You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you
could expert from actual speakers with SILENT
CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP
by connecting your headphones to the
SILENT jack
while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the
DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT”
indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When
sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal
stereo reproduction.)
y
• When SILENT CINEMA DSP is functioning, the “SILENT”
indicator lights up on the front panel display.
Notes
• This feature is not available when 96-kHz sampling digital
signals are input to this unit.
• The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the
headphone.
■ Normal Stereo Reproduction
Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect for normal
stereo reproduction.
Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back on.
Notes
• If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the
center or rear speakers.
• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the
sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU
to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.
• The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the front left and
right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the
setting of “1D BASS” on the SET MENU.
• If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is
automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear
speaker channels are mixed and output from the front speakers.
■ Displaying the information about
input signal
During stereo reproduction, you can display information
such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the
signal input from the components connected to this unit.
(While playing a stereo source)
1 Press AMP.
2 Press d to display the information about the
input signal.
y
• Format:
The type of an input signal. When digital input is not known,
the mode is set to the analog mode.
• fs:
The sampling frequency of an input signal when a digital signal
is input. If the frequency is not known, “unknown” appears on
the front panel display.
• Audio Channels:
The number of audio channels included in an input signal when
a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input.
• Rate (bit rate):
The amount of data contained in an input signal per second
when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input. If the bit rate is
not known, “unknown” appears on the front panel display.
• Flg (flag):
An identification signal contained in an input signal when a
Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input. If the flag is not detected,
“None” appears on the front panel display.
■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital
signals
The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz
sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz
sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
– DSP programs cannot be selected.
– Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the
front left and right speakers. (There may be sound
output from the subwoofer depending on the
SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.)
Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be
adjusted while listening to such a source.
Input signal
Analog signal
PCM signal
Dolby Digital signal
DTS signal
Other digital signals
Display
Analog
PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
Unknwn Digital
(Unknown Digital)
105_S100_21-28_EN 02.5.13, 1:30 PM27
28
RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for these components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected component.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
The procedure for selecting an input source is the
same as the one described in “BASIC PLAYBACK”
on page 21.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Notes
• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between the components connected to this unit.
• The setting of BASS BOOST, VOLUME, “5 L/R BALANCE”
on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not effect the
recorded material.
• A given input source is not output to the same OUT (Rec)
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not
output to VCR OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material
may infringe copyright laws.
• It is not possible to record the sound effect created by this
unit’s DSP processing.
• While recording video images played during the DVD mode,
do not display ON-SCREEN menu. If displayed, the menu will
be also recorded.
• During digital recording, Karaoke vocal and Cinema dialog
functions do not work. (See pages 35 and 36.)
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
■ Special considerations when
recording DTS software
Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will
result in noise being recorded.
■ Timer playback/recording
This unit can perform playback or recording with an
external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating
instructions for the component and the timer to be used.
Notes
• Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when
playback or recording with the timer.
• If you do not want any sound output when recording with a
timer, turn the volume down.
29
PLAYING A DISC
English
Region management information
This unit is designed to meet DVD standard that supports
region management system. Check the regional code
number marked on the disc packages. If the number does
not match this unit’s region number (see the table shown
below or the back of this unit), this unit refuses to play
that disc.
Notes about handling discs
• Hold discs by touching only the edges or center hole.
• When a disc is not currently being loaded on the disc
tray, store it in an appropriate case.
• Do not use a disc printed on its surface by a
commercially available label printer.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight, high temperature
or high humidity for a long period of time, because
these might warp or otherwise damage the disc.
Types of disc that this unit can
play
This unit is designed for use with following types of disc
only. Never attempt to load any other type of disc into this
unit because it may damage this unit.
In this manual, the type of discs are indicated as below.
Notes
• This unit is not compatible with Photo-CD, CD-ROM, DVD-
ROM, DVD-RAM, SVCD, CDV, etc. (some DVD-R, DVD-
RW and DVD+RW can be played).
• Be sure to use only discs made by reliable manufacturers.
Some discs cannot be played depending on the disc
characteristics or recording conditions.
• Do not use any non standard shaped discs (heart, etc.).
• Some DVD and VCD features described in this manual may
not be available or may operate in a different way because they
are subject to software producer’s design. Check each disc’s
instruction.
• This unit cannot play the video parts of a disc whose video
signal type is PAL. (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
DISC INFORMATION
NO!
DVD-Video DVD-Audio Video CD Audio CD
CD
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
DIGITAL VIDEO
Model
U.S.A. and Canada
models
U.K. and Europe
models
Australia model
General model
Region
number of
this unit
“1”
“2”
“4”
“3”
Discs can be
played
“1”, “ALL” or a
mark which includes
the region number
“1”.
“2”, “ALL” or a
mark which includes
the region number
“2”.
“4”, “ALL” or a
mark which includes
the region number
“4”.
“3”, “ALL” or a
mark which includes
the region number
“3”.
30
DISC INFORMATION
• Playback of discs is generally not affected by small
particles of dust or fingerprints on their playing surface.
Even so, they should be kept clean. Wipe by using a
clean, dry cloth. Do not wipe with a circular motion;
wipe straight outward from the center.
• Do not try to clean the disc’s surface by using any type
of disc cleaner, record spray, anti-static spray or liquid,
or any other chemical-based liquid, because such
substances might irreparably damage the disc’s surface.
MP3 playback
This unit can play MP3 format audio recorded for
personal use with a computer etc. onto CD-R or CD-RW.
Play may not be possible in some cases due to the
condition of the recording.
Discs recorded using MP3 differ from CDs in the
following ways.
Structure of the disc (example)
Since the MP3 format can store several albums on a disc,
a folder is assigned to a “Title”, and a file is assigned to a
“Chapter”.
Starting play from a selected chapter
Select a chapter using the numeric buttons (see “To select
a specific track” on page 33) and press ENTER.
Repeat play
You can use chapter repeat or title repeat. (See page 45.)
On-screen icons for disc information during play
y
• The following settings are recommended.
– The bit rate 128kbps
(The bit rates ranging from 32kbps to 320kbps are accepted.)
– The sampling frequency 44.1kHz
(The sampling frequency 32kHz is not accepted.)
Note
• Chapters may not be played in the order that you arranged
them when recording.
1/ 59
C
0 : 01
Elapsed play time (display only,
you cannot use “time index”
feature.)
Total chapter number
Current chapter
Root directory
: Title (Folder)
: Chapter (File)
31
PLAYING A DISC
English
REMOTE CONTROL (DVD MODE)
This section explains how each button on the remote
control functions when you play a disc. Press DVD first
when using this unit as a DVD player.
• The buttons on the remote control whose names are
written in green are operation buttons when you
operate this unit in the DVD mode.
• When pressing any of 79tyuiop while
pressing SHIFT, these buttons function to operate this
unit as a DVD player.
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
CH
PRESET
CH
s
a
y
t
e
6
7
8
9
0
q
w
2
3
4
5
1
u
i
o
p
r
SHIFT
1 SUBTITLE
Press to select a subtitle language.
2 d
Press to pause.
3 t y (P.33)
4 w
Press to start playback.
5 a
Press to stop playback.
6 v
Press to open and close the disc tray.
7 SETUP
Press to call up the setup menu screen.
8 Numeric buttons/CANCEL
Press to enter numbers./Press to cancel a specific mode or
a setting.
9 PLAY MODE
Press to switch among random play, program play, and
normal play.
0 TOP MENU
Press to display a disc menu screen.
q u, d, j, i/ENTER
Use to select and determine an item on menu screen, etc.
w ON SCREEN
Press to turn the on-screen icons on and off on the video
monitor.
e AUDIO (P.41)
r e r (P.33)
t ANGLE (P.41)
y MARKER (P.44)
u REPEAT (P.45)
i A-B (P.46)
o GROUP (P.39)
p PAGE (P.40)
a MENU
Press to call up menu screen contained in the disc.
s RETURN
Press to go back to the previous screen when operating in
the menu screen.
DVD mode
(U.S.A. model)
32
PLAYING A DISC
Basic operation
1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or
POWER (
) on the remote control to turn
the power on.
2 Press v to open the disc tray.
3 Load a disc.
4 Press w.
The disc tray closes and playback starts.
y
• When a menu screen appears
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
:
See “Using a disc’s menu” on page 38.
Notes
• When this unit finishes playing a DVD, this unit stops playback
or shows the menu screen.
• This unit cannot play a CD-R or CD-RW disc unless the disc
has been finalized. Please make sure to finalize the disc on the
CD recorder before playing it on this unit.
■ To stop playback
Press a.
Resume function
This unit memorizes where a was pressed as long as this
unit is turned on (W indicator flashes on the display).
When you press w in this status, playback resumes from
where it was stopped.
To clear the memory, press a once more so that the W
indicator goes off. (When a DVD-Video disc is played, a
chapter review screen appears.)
Note
• Opening the disc tray cancels the resume function.
Chapter review function
DVD-V
This function plays the first few seconds of each chapter
from the beginning of the title up to the memorized point
so that you can review previous chapters.
Press w while the message for chapter review is displayed
on the screen.
Notes
• This function may not work with some DVDs.
• Canceling resume function will also clear the chapter review
function.
■ After operation
Remove the disc by pressing v and then press
STANDBY/ON on the front panel or POWER(
) on the
remote control.
STANDBY/ON
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/BAND P
wv
STANDBY/ON
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
3
ROCK
4
ENTERTAINMENT
DVD
CD
AMP
POWER ( )
w
a
v
(U.S.A. model)
33
PLAYING A DISC
PLAYING A DISC
English
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
PRESET
CHCH
j, i
1
7
≥10
t
y
e
d
r
■ Skip
Press y (or t) on the remote control to skip forward
(or backward).
or
Press r/y (or t/e) on the front panel to skip
forward (or backward).
Press t on the remote control or t/e on the front
panel once for each chapter (track) to be skipped.
Note
• When playing a VCD with playback control (p.38), skip
operation may not function as described above.
■ To select a specific track
VCD
CD
Enter a desired track number using numeric buttons.
To select a two-digit number, press ≥10 and then enter the
upper figure and the last figure successively.
Example (to select track 17):
1 Press ≥10.
2 Press 1.
3 Press 7.
■ Search
Press r (or e) on the remote control to search forward
(or backward).
or
Press and hold r/y (or t/e) on the front panel to
search forward (or backward).
y
• To increase the speed, press or keep pressing r, e on the
remote control repeatedly or keep pressing r/y, t/e on
the front panel.
Note
• If you search forward or backward while a Dolby Digital or
DTS disc is played, the input mode is automatically switched
to the analog mode and cannot be switched to other modes.
■ Pause
Press d.
To resume play, press w.
■ Frame advance/reverse
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
1 Press d during playback.
2 Press the cursor buttons (j, i).
• To return to normal play, press w.
• Each time you press the cursor buttons (j, i), or
when you keep pressing them, frames keep
advancing or reversing.
• Frames also advance when d is pressed.
• With some DVD-Audio discs, frames advance or
reverse only in the video parts.
Note
• With Video CD, you cannot move backward.
■ Slow
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
1 Press d during playback.
2 Press r (or e) on the remote control.
or
Press and hold r/y (or t/e) on the
front panel.
• To return to normal play, press w.
• To increase the speed, press or keep pressing
r, e on the remote control repeatedly or keep
pressing r/y, t/e on the front panel.
Note
• With Video CD, you cannot move backward.
(U.S.A. model)
34
ON-SCREEN MENU
You can control various items using on-screen menu bar.
Operating menu bar
1 Press ON SCREEN.
Each time ON SCREEN is pressed, the menu bar
changes as below.
Icons for player menu has 4 different menu
bars as below. To switch the menu bar, press
the cursor buttons (u, d).
2 Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select the
item you wish to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to
change setting.
• With some items, you need to press ENTER or i
to determine the setting.
• You can also use the numeric buttons when
entering numbers to select a chapter, etc.
■ To turn the screen off
Press RETURN repeatedly.
Note
• Some items cannot be accessed when the play is stopped.
■ To change the menu bar position
When the menu bar does not appear properly, you can
adjust its position.
1 Select the rightmost icon ( ).
2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to move the
menu bar.
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
PRESET
CH
ON SCREEN
RETURN
w
u, d , j, i
/ENTER
d
a
Numeric buttons
OFF
1 2 3 ✱✱
AB
–––
2
C
2
1 : 46 : 50
1 ENG 3/2.1 ch
Digital
ENG
ON
1
1
T
+
100
–
100
a
b
c
N
OFF
SP OFF
OFF BRIGHT
IPB
OFF
1 2 3 ✱✱
AB
–––
d
e
f
g
Icons for disc menu
Icons for player menu
Shuttle screen
Off
Play menu
Display menu
Audio menu
Video menu
N
Example)
(U.S.A. model)
35
ON-SCREEN MENU
PLAYING A DISC
English
Karaoke vocal on/off
DVD-A
DVD-V
(Karaoke DVD only)
This works only when DISC DIRECT
is functioning.
Solo: OFF or ON
Duet: OFF, V1+V2, V1 or V2
DVD-A
DVD-V
1 Subtitle on/off
2 Subtitle language
Angle number
DVD-A
DVD-V
When selecting an angle number, the
scene encoded with that angle is
played.
Playback control
Indicates whether playback control is
on or off.
VCD
Playback control cannot be adjusted.
Page number
DVD-A
When you select a page number, the
picture on that page is played.
Title number
DVD-V
Track number
DVD-A
VCD
CD
Chapter number
DVD-V
Group number
DVD-A
Time index
(hour:minute:second)
DVD-A
DVD-V
You can start play from the desired
point by specifying the elapsed time.
Eg) If you start play from 1:46:50
(1 hr 46 min 50 sec), press in the
following order.
[1]^[4]^[6]^[5]^[0]^[ENTER]
Changing the time display
DVD-A
VCD
CD
Audio mode
VCD
When you select a channel, sound is
output from the channel you have
selected.
DVD-A
DVD-V
1 Audio track number
2 Audio track Language:
See Å for language abbreviations.
3 Audio signal type: See ı for
details.
Icons for disc menu
eg) DVD-Video
2
C
2
1 : 46 : 50
1 ENG 3/2.1 ch
Digital
ENG
ON
1
1
T
Track elapsed time
Track remaining time
Disc remaining time
LR L R
2
T
2
C
2
G
1 : 46 : 50
L R
1 ENG 3/2.1 ch
Digital
12 3
1 ✱
Vocal
OFF
ENG
ON
1
1
2
1
ON
P B C
Page
1
Notes
• Display may differ in accordance with the disc’s specification.
• Time remaining on the disc does not appears during program or
random-sequence play.
• When playing a video-CD disc using playback control, no track
number or time is displayed.
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
DAN: Danish
POR: Portuguese
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
VIE: Vietnamese
THA: Thai
*: Others
Å Language
ı Signal type/data
LPCM/PPCM/qDolbyDigital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type
k (kHz): Sampling frequency
b (bit): Number of bits
ch (channel): Number of channels
Example:
3/2 .1ch
1: Subwoofer
(not displayed if there is no subwoofer signal)
0: Rear channel not available on the disc
1: Rear channel (monaural)
2: Rear channels (left/right)
1: Front channel (monaural)
2: Front channels (left/right)
3: Front channels (left/right) + Center
36
ON-SCREEN MENU
Icons for player menu
■ Play mode menu
eg) DVD-Video
A-B repeat (^ P.46)
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
[ENTER] (start point)^[ENTER] (finish
point)
To cancel
[ENTER]
Repeat play (^ P.45)
DVD-V
C: Chapter, T: Title, OFF: Normal play
DVD-A
VCD
CD
T: Track, A: All, G: Group, OFF: Normal play
Play mode display
DVD-A
VCD
CD
The play modes cannot be adjusted.
RND: Random play, PGM: Programmed play,
– – –: Normal play,
ALL: All groups
DVD-A
Bookmarks (^ P.44)
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
You can mark at the points where you want to
play again.
(up to 5 points)
To mark a point
[j, i]^[ENTER] (at the desired point)
To recall a bookmark
[j, i]^[ENTER]
To erase a bookmark
[j, i]^[CANCEL]
IPB display
DVD-V
Displays the picture type (I/P/B)* of a still
picture (when paused).
ON OFF
*I/P/B (P.73)
Display dimmer
Changes the brightness of the front panel
display.
BRIGHT DIM AUTO*
When you select AUTO, the front panel
display gets darker when the disc on which
video images are recorded is being played. But
when you pause etc, it gets brighter tempo-
rarily.
This cannot be adjusted.
Cinema dialog
DVD-V
(Dolby Digital/DTS 3ch or more channel
discs)
This works only when DISC DIRECT is
functioning. When selecting ON, the volume
level of the dialog part output from the center
channel increases.
■ Display menu
eg) DVD-Video
OFF
1 2 3 ✱✱
AB
–––
AB
OFF
–––
1 2 3 ✱✱
OFF BRIGHT
IPB
■ Audio menu
eg) DVD-Video
SP OFF
OFF
OFF
IPB
BRIGHT
SP OFF
OFF
106_S100_29-37_EN 02.5.13, 1:30 PM36
37
ON-SCREEN MENU
PLAYING A DISC
English
Digital picture mode
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
N: Normal
C: Cinema image (suited for movie viewing)
Transfer MODE
Selects the method of conversion for
progressive output to suit the type of material
being played.
Auto (normal): for viewing film material
Video: for video material
Digital picture mode
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
N: Normal
C: Cinema image (suited for movie viewing)
U: User mode
To change the user mode
1 Select User mode.
2 Press (j, i) to select the item you wish to
change.
3 Press (u, d) to change the setting.
The following items are displayed when
you select “U”.
U Contrast (–7 to +7)
Adjusts the contrast between light and
dark part of the picture.
Brightness (0 to +15)
Adjusts the brightness of the picture.
Sharpness (–6 to +6) (U.K., Europe,
Australia and General models)
Adjusts the horizontal resolution of the
picture.
Color (–7 to +7)
Adjusts the shade of the picture’s color.
When PROGRESSIVE is on (U.S.A. and Canada models)
■ Video menu
N
N
0
0
0
0
N
Auto
N
■ Shuttle screen
Slow-motion play
: Backward
DVD-A
DVD-V
Pause
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
Slow-motion play
: Forward
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
Search
: Backward
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
Play
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
Search
: Forward
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
+
100
–
100
Note
• Slow-motion only works on the video parts of DVD-Audio.
Auto
38
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
Using a disc’s menu
Discs may contain multiple audio tracks, subtitles, index
and bonus materials such as movie trailers and cast
information, etc. And many of them have menu screens
that enable you to control these features. This section
gives you general instruction about how to operate these
screens. However, the operation methods may differ
depending on the disc.
DVD-A
DVD-V
1 Press TOP MENU or MENU during playback
to show menu screen.
With some discs, menu screen appears automatically
when you start playback.
2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to
select the desired item and then press
ENTER.
■ Video CD’s playback control
VCD
If a Video CD has “playback control” written on it or its
jacket, it means that particular scenes or information can
be selected for viewing interactively with the television
using the menu screen. This unit can play Video CDs with
playback control.
Using menus to control play of a Video CD is called
“menu play” in these operating instructions.
Numeric buttons: Press to select the desired item.
RETURN: Press to go back to the previous screen.
w (PLAY): Press to play the selected item.
y: Press to show the next screen.
t: Press to show the previous screen.
a (STOP): Press while a menu screen appears on the
video monitor to cancel the playback control.
Note
• Playback control is automatically canceled during program
play or random-sequence play.
Enhancing video quality [U.S.A.
and Canada models only]
This unit’s component video outputs are capable of output
progressive signals. You can enjoy even higher quality
picture if you have connected this unit to a monitor that
can receive progressive signals.
Press PROGRESSIVE on the front panel.
The PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up.
To cancel this feature, press PROGRESSIVE again.
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
PRESET
CH
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
w
a
u, d, j, i
/ ENTER
t
y
Numeric buttons
(U.S.A. model)
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY
PROGRESSIVE
AUTO/MAN’L
DISC DIRECT
PROGRESSIVE
DISC DIRECT
SILENT
PROGRESSIVE
PROGRESSIVE indicator
(U.S.A. model)
39
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
PLAYING A DISC
English
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL
HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE
FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT
AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE
DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525
PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT
IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH
THE CONNECTION TO THE “STANDARD
DEFINITION” OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE
QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR VIDEO
MONITOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL
525P DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
This unit is compatible with YAMAHA digital cinema
projector DPX-1.
DVD-Audio features
DVD-A
■ To play a track on a specific
group
1 Press GROUP while pressing SHIFT.
The group and track icons appear on the video
monitor.
2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a
group number and press ENTER.
3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a
track number and press ENTER.
The selected track starts to play.
y
• You can also use the numeric buttons to select a group and a
track.
Notes
• If the screen shifts off center when using progressive output,
see “Adjusting the screen position” described below.
• When playing 4:3 aspect software with a 16:9 aspect wide-
screen monitor using progressive output, the picture may
appear horizontally stretched to fill the screen. In that case,
change the aspect to the correct one at your monitor. If the
monitor cannot change the aspect, it is recommended to turn
the progressive feature off. (The progressive output is switched
to the interlace output.)
• When the PROGRESSIVE function is working, video signals
are output only from the component video jacks.
■ Adjusting the screen position
(when using progressive output)
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
With some video monitors, the screen may shift off center
with progressive signals output from this unit. To adjust
the position, follow the method described below using the
remote control.
1 Press d to pause play.
2 Follow the step 1 on “Operating menu bar”
on page 34 to show the video menu.
3 Press i to select the rightmost icon ( ).
4 Adjust the position.
To move to the left, press the numeric button 1.
To move to the right, press the numeric button 3.
• Pressing the numeric button 2 after pressing 1 or 3
sets the screen back to the original position.
• You can check whether the picture is in the center
or not by switching to normal output (press
PROGRESSIVE so the indicator turns off).
5 Save the adjusted position.
First press a and then press SETUP to show setup
menu. Then press SETUP once again (or RETURN)
and now the position is saved.
Press 3 to move to the right.
Example:
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
u, d, j, i
/ ENTER
PAGE
SHIFT
GROUP
(U.S.A. model)
107_S100_38-53_EN 02.5.13, 1:31 PM39
40
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
■ To play a bonus group
Some discs contain bonus groups. If it requires 4 digit
password, consult the disc jacket, etc.
1 Press a to stop play.
2 Press GROUP while pressing SHIFT.
The group and track icons appear on the video
monitor.
3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a
bonus group and then press ENTER or the
cursor button (i).
4 Enter a 4 digit password using the numeric
buttons and then press ENTER.
5 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a
track and then press ENTER.
■ To change pages
DVD-Audio may contain some information screens called
“pages” that show photo galleries, artist biographies and
lyrics, etc.
When it appears, you can move to another page by
pressing PAGE while SHIFT is pressed. (Page number
appears on the display when you change pages.).
Enhancing audio quality (DISC
DIRECT)
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
If you operate the DISC DIRECT function, a DVD-Audio
disc is played with the multi-channels, and the DVD-
Audio disc recorded with the 192kHz sampling frequency
is played, keeping the original sound quality. This
function also has an effect on improving the sound quality
of a disc recorded with lower sampling frequency.
Press DISC DIRECT.
Each time DISC DIRECT is pressed, the display
changes as follows: AUTO^ON^OFF^AUTO -...
• AUTO: Some discs switch this function on or off.
(In the case of DVD-Audio discs, AUTO is
automatically switched to ON.)
• ON: DISC DIRECT is turned on.
• OFF (initial setting): DISC DIRECT is turned off.
y
• When DISC DIRECT is functioning, the DISC DIRECT
indicator on the front panel lights up.
• To adjust the output level of speakers while DISC DIRECT is
functioning, see “Speaker settings” on the SETUP MENU on
page 52.
Notes
• DISC DIRECT does not function while a SETUP MENU
screen is displayed.
• When DISC DIRECT is functioning, note the following:
– Sound effect is not added to reproduced sound. (Turn DISC
DIRECT off to add sound effect.)
– Only 1E, 5, 9 settings of the SET MENU items function. (See
page 59.)
– The output level of effect speakers cannot be adjusted during
playback. (See page 64.)
– Adjusting the output level of speakers using test tone in the
AMP mode cannot be made. (See page 20.)
– The displays of decoders, PCM, input signal channels etc do
not light up on the front panel display.
– The speaker settings are switched to the settings for DVD
use. (See page 52.)
– When using headphones, set the “Speaker settings” on the
SETUP MENU to “2-channel”. (See page 52.)
– With some discs, sound may not be output from the
subwoofer.
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L
DISC DIRECT
DISC DIRECT
SILENT
DISC DIRECT
DISC DIRECT indicator
41
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
PLAYING A DISC
English
Switching audio tracks, subtitles
and angles
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
Some discs are encoded with several audio tracks,
multilingual subtitles or multiple camera angles. Refer to
disc jacket etc. to see which feature is supported.
■ Audio tracks
Different audio track languages and/or formats can be
selected if available on the disc.
Press AUDIO during play.
• Pressing the button repeatedly toggles through all
audio tracks recorded on the disc. You can also use
the cursor buttons (u, d) or the numeric buttons
to change tracks.
Notes
• Play restarts from the beginning of the current track if you
change audio track while playing DVD-Audio, other than video
section.
• With DVD-Audio, track number 2 may appear even if the disc
does not support multiple audio tracks.
• You can also use the button to turn the vocals on and off on
karaoke discs. See the instruction of each disc.
This icon appears on the
video monitor.
■ Subtitles
Press SUBTITLE during play.
• Pressing the button repeatedly toggles through all
subtitles recorded on the disc. You can also use the
cursor buttons (u, d) or the numeric buttons to
change subtitles.
Notes
•“- -” appears if the disc does not have a subtitle.
• Subtitles may not change immediately after you press the
button.
To turn on/off the subtitles:
1 Press SUBTITLE.
2 Press the cursor button (i).
(
DVD-A
,
DVD-V
ONLY)
3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select ON
and OFF.
■ Angles
Some DVDs have scenes encoded with multiple camera
angles so that different viewpoint can be selected during
playback. ANGLE lights up on the front panel display
while a scene encoded with multiple angles is being
played.
Press ANGLE while pressing SHIFT.
• Pressing ANGLE repeatedly while pressing SHIFT
toggles through all angles recorded on the disc.
You can also use the cursor buttons (u, d) or the
numeric buttons to change angles.
■ To turn the icon off
Press RETURN.
Notes
• With some discs, you cannot change audio tracks, subtitles or
angles in the way described above. In that case, go to the disc
menu and change them.
• With some discs, you cannot change angles.
This icon appears on the
video monitor.
This icon appears on the video
monitor.
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
PRESET
CH
RETURN
AUDIO
SHIFT
ANGLE
SUBTITLE
u, d, j, i
Numeric buttons
(U.S.A. model)
96k24b
LPCM
1
ENG
ON
1
1
42
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
2 Press PLAY MODE repeatedly while pressing
SHIFT to select the program screen.
Each time you press PLAY MODE while pressing
SHIFT, the screen changes as follows:
y
• The “PGM” indicator lights up on the front panel display.
3 Press numeric buttons to select the track.
4 Press w to start play.
y
• You can also use the numeric buttons to select a track.
(In the case of DVD-Audio)
• The “All group play” screen is added to step 2.
• In step 4, press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a
group and then press ENTER. Then, press the cursor
buttons (u, d) again to select a track and then press
ENTER.
• You can also use the numeric buttons to select a group
and a track.
All group play
DVD-A
1 Press a to stop play.
2 Press PLAY MODE while pressing SHIFT.
The “All group play” screen appears.
3 Press w.
Programmed play
DVD-A
VCD
CD
You can enjoy listening to your favorite tracks selected
from a disc in any desired order by programming tracks.
1 Press a to stop play.
Indication on the video monitor (example)
Program screen ( Programmed play mode)
Playing in your desired order
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
PRESET
CH
CANCEL
SHIFT
PLAY MODE
w
a
u, d, j, i
/ ENTER
(U.S.A. model)
Numeric buttons
PLAY MODE
Choose a track, then press ENTER.
No Track
Press PLAY to start
Play
0:00
Time
Clear
Clear all
Total time
1
ENTER
SELECT
RETURN
Random screen (Random play mode)
Playing in random sequence
Returning to normal play
43
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
PLAYING A DISC
English
■ To change or add to the program
during programmed play
1 Press a repeatedly to stop programmed
play.
2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the
order of the tracks you want to play.
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter a track
number.
■ To cancel the programmed tracks
1 Press a repeatedly to stop programmed
play.
2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the
track you want to cancel.
3 Press CANCEL.
Note
• When you program a track of a Video CD (ver.2.0),
playback control is canceled during programmed play.
■ To move up and down the pages
on the program screen
Press e to move up the page, or press r to move
down the page.
■ To exit programming mode
1 Press a repeatedly to stop programmed
play.
2 Press PLAY MODE twice while pressing
SHIFT.
• When turning the power off, opening the disc tray,
or switching the input source, all the programs are
canceled.
Random play
DVD-A
VCD
CD
When you select this mode, this unit plays all tracks on a
disc in random sequence.
1 Press a to stop play.
2 Press PLAY MODE repeatedly while pressing
SHIFT.
The “RND” indicator lights up on the front panel
display.
3 Press w to start random play.
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
PRESET
CH
PLAY MODE
CANCEL
SHIFT
ENTER
w
a
j, i
(U.S.A. model)
44
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
■ To cancel random mode
1 Press a repeatedly to stop playback during
random play.
2 Press PLAY MODE while pressing SHIFT.
The “RND” indicator goes off.
• Opening the disc tray also cancels this mode.
Note
• When this unit is in random mode while a Video CD
(ver.2.0) is loaded, playback control is canceled during
random play.
■ Random play (DVD-Audio)
In the step 2 of “Random play”, press the cursor buttons
(j, i) to select a group and then press ENTER.
y
• You can select more than one group.
• You can use the numeric buttons to select a group.
If you want to cancel the group(s) you have selected
while selecting them, press the cursor buttons (j, i) to
select the group you want to cancel, and then press
CANCEL or ENTER.
y
• You can also cancel a group by entering the number you want
to cancel using numeric buttons.
Bookmarks
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
This feature allows you to mark up to 5 points so that you
can quickly return to those points later.
1 Press MARKER while pressing SHIFT.
2 Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select one
of five asterisks.
The selected asterisk is highlighted.
3 Press ENTER.
The selected asterisk turns to be the bookmark
number.
■ To play from the marked point
Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select a bookmark
number and press ENTER.
■ To clear a bookmark
Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select a bookmark
number and press CANCEL.
Note
• When you open the disc tray, turn this unit off or switch the
input source, all bookmarks are cleared.
Bookmark number
Highlighted
All 1 2
Choose a group or groups.
Random Playback
Press PLAY to start
ENTER
SELECT
RETURN
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
MARKER
SHIFT
CANCEL
j, i
/
ENTER
(U.S.A. model)
Eg) DVD-Audio (The disc that has 2 groups.)
This icon appears on the video
monitor.
This icon appears on the video
monitor.
45
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
PLAYING A DISC
English
Repeat play
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
This function allows you to play your desired chapter,
track or disc repeatedly.
Press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT during
playback to select repeat mode.
Each time this button is pressed, repeat mode
changes as follows. The name of the selected repeat
mode scrolls once on the multi-information display
and the corresponding indicators light up.
DVD-Video
C: CHAPTER: The current chapter is played
repeatedly.
T: TITLE: The current title is played repeatedly.
OFF: NORMAL PLAY: Repeat mode is canceled.
DVD-Audio/Video-CD/CD
T: TRACK: The current track is played repeatedly.
A: ALL (Video CD, CD): The current disc is played
repeatedly.
or
G: GROUP (DVD Audio): The current group is
played repeatedly.
OFF: NORMAL PLAY: Repeat mode is canceled.
y
• When the repeat mode is OFF, “ ” indicator goes off.
Notes
• Repeat play may not work properly with some DVD-Video.
• Repeat play does not work with an interactive DVD-Video or
during menu play of a VCD with playback control.
■ Program repeat
DVD-A
VCD
CD
Press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT during
programmed play. (p.42)
Each time you press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT,
the repeat mode changes as follows:
DVD-Audio/Video-CD/CD
T: TRACK: The current track is played repeatedly.
A: ALL: The current programmed track is played
repeatedly.
OFF: NORMAL PLAY: Repeat mode is canceled.
(returning to normal program play)
■ Random-sequence repeat
DVD-A
VCD
CD
Press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT during
random play. (p.43)
Each time you press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT,
the repeat mode changes as follows:
DVD-Audio/Video-CD/CD
T: TRACK: The current track is played repeatedly.
A: ALL: The current disc is played repeatedly.
OFF: NORMAL PLAY: Repeat mode is canceled.
(returning to normal random play)
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
REPEAT
SHIFT
(U.S.A. model)
C
Eg) DVD-Video
PGM
A
Eg) CD
Eg) CD
RND
A
46
USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS
Repeat A-B
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
CD
This function allows you to specify two points and play
between them repeatedly.
1 Press A-B while pressing SHIFT during play
at the point where you want to start A-B
repeat.
y
•“ ” and “A-” light up on the front panel display.
2 Press A-B while pressing SHIFT at the point
where you want to end A-B repeat.
y
•“B” is added on the front panel display. The section
between the point A and B starts playing repeatedly.
This icon appears on the video
monitor.
This icon appears on the video
monitor.
■ To cancel A-B repeat
Press A-B while pressing SHIFT.
Notes
• This function may not available with some DVD-Video.
• This function works only within a title (DVD-Video) or a track
(DVD-Audio, VCD, CD).
This icon appears on the video
monitor.
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
A-B
SHIFT
(U.S.A. model)
A
AB
47
PLAYING A DISC
English
SETUP MENU
With the setup menu, you can change this unit’s system
defaults to suit your preference and this system.
Operating the setup menu
1 Press SETUP while pressing SHIFT.
The menu screen appears on the video monitor.
2 Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select a
menu group.
There are five menu groups. The screen shows the
items that belong to the menu group of the selected
tab.
3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the
desired item and press ENTER.
4 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to change
the setting and press ENTER.
When pressing ENTER, you can go back to the
screen in step 2.
■ To go back to the previous
screen
Press RETURN.
■ To get out from the setup menu
mode
Press SETUP while pressing SHIFT.
Note
• When you display the setup menu screen, the DISC DIRECT
function is automatically turned on. When finishing the setup
menu, the setting of the function is automatically returned to
the previous setting.
■ To return all the settings on the
setup menu to the factory
settings
(While playback is stopped)
Keep pressing d and a on the front panel
together until “Initialized” appears on the
video monitor.
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
SETUP
RETURN
u, d, j, i
/ ENTER
SHIFT
(U.S.A. model)
Disc
SETUP
Audio
M
English
1
2
SETUP
At ti
Video
TV Aspect
4:3 Pan&Scan
TV Type
3
Audio
Multi-channelSpeaker Setting
SETUP
Display
ML Elih
SETUP
4
5
Others
SETUP
Disc menu
Video menu
Audio menu
Display menu
Others menu
48
SETUP MENU
Summary of settings
The following chart shows the menu groups and each items. In the “Options” column, the factory settings are
underlined.
Menu groups
Disc
Video
Items
Audio
DVD-A
DVD-V
Select the preferred audio track language.
Subtitle
DVD-A
DVD-V
Select the preferred subtitle language.
Menus
DVD-A
DVD-V
Select the preferred disc menu language.
Ratings
DVD-V
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. See p.51 for details.
TV Aspect
If you connect to a 4:3 conventional-type monitor, select “4:3
Pan&Scan” (left and right sides trimmed when playing 16:9
software) or “4:3 Letterbox” (black areas appear at the top and
bottom when playing 16:9 software). Select “16:9” if you connect
to a widescreen monitor.
Still Mode
Specify the type of picture shown when paused. First select
“Automatic”. If a still picture jitters, select “Field”. If details don’t
appear clearly enough, select “Frame”.
Options
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
English French Spanish Original*
Other**
(Australia model)
English French German Italian
Spanish Original* Other**
(U.K. and Europe models)
English French German Italian
Spanish Original* Other**
(General model)
English Chinese Original* Other**
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Automatic English French
Spanish Other**
(Australia model)
Automatic English French
German Italian Spanish
Other**
(U.K. and Europe models)
Automatic English French
German Italian Spanish
Other**
(General model)
Automatic English Chinese
Other**
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
English French Spanish Other**
(Australia model)
English French German Italian
Spanish Other**
(U.K. and Europe models)
English French German Italian
Spanish Other**
(General model)
English Chinese Other**
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
8 No Limit 1 to 7 0 Lock All
Changing ratings (When level 0 – 7 is
selected)
Unlock Player Change Level
Change Password Temporary Unlock
4:3 Pan&Scan 4:3 Letterbox
16:9
Automatic Field Frame
49
SETUP MENU
PLAYING A DISC
English
Menu groups
Video
Audio
Display
Items
Black Level Control
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Change the black level of the picture. Select “Lighter” when you
connect to the monitor using VIDEO or S VIDEO terminal. Select
“Darker” when using COMPONENT terminals.
NTSC Disc Output
(U.K., Europe, Australia and General models)
Select video signal format (PAL 60 or NTSC) to be output when
playing NTSC disc.
Speaker Setting
DVD-A
DVD-V
Adjust the settings to suit your audio system and your listening
environment when DISC DIRECT is functioning. See p.52 for
details.
PCM Down Conversion
DVD-A
DVD-V
Select how to output the high sampling-frequency audio signals on
a disc that is not copyright-protected. See p.51 for details.
Dolby Digital
DVD-A
DVD-V
Decide the signal type that output from this unit’s digital outputs.
Select “Bitstream” when connected device has Dolby Digital
decoder. Select “PCM” when not.
DTS Digital Surround
DVD-A
DVD-V
Decide the signal type that output from this unit’s digital outputs.
Select “Bitstream” when connected device has DTS decoder. Select
“PCM” when not.
MPEG
DVD-A
DVD-V
(U.K., Europe and Australia models)
Decide the signal type that output from this unit’s digital outputs.
Select “Bitstream” when connected device has MPEG decoder.
Select “PCM” when not.
D. Range Compression
DVD-A
DVD-V
(Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing. Select “On” to
make it easier to hear dialog etc. even at low volume level.
Audio during Search
DVD-A
DVD-V
VCD
Select whether to have sound during search. Select “Off” if sound
distorted when searching with Dolby Digital or DTS material. With
DVD-Audio, the sound may be heard even if you select “Off”.
Menu Language
Select the preferred language for on-screen messages and setup
menu.
On-Screen Messages
Select whether to show on-screen messages or not.
Options
Lighter Darker
(U.K., Europe and Australia models)
PAL 60 NTSC
(General model)
PAL 60 NTSC
Multi-channel:
Select this when connected to multi-channel
system. There are three sub-items as below.
• Speaker presence and size
• Delay time
• Channel balance
2-channel:
Select this when connected to 2-channel
system.
No Yes
Bitstream PCM
Bitstream PCM
Bitstream PCM
Off On
On Off
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
English Français Español
(Australia model)
English Français Deutsch Italiano
Español
(U.K. and Europe models)
English Français Deutsch Italiano
Español
(General model)
English
On Off
107_S100_38-53_EN 02.5.13, 1:32 PM49
50
SETUP MENU
Menu groups
Others
Items
DVD-Video Mode
Some DVD-Audio discs contain the DVD-Video contents that can
be played only by a DVD-Video player. If you want to play the
contents, select “On”. If not, select “Off”.
Demo
A demonstration of the unit’s on-screen displays starts when you
select “On”. The demonstration stops when you press button a etc.
and the setting reverts to “Off”.
Options
Off On
Off On
Notes
• * If you set to “Original” at Audio, the original language of each disc is selected.
**If you set to “Other” at Audio, Subtitle or Menus, you need to select a four-digit number of the desired language from the language
code list and enter with numeric buttons.
• When the audio you have selected from “Audio” is not recorded on the disc but instead the subtitle of the same language is recorded
on it, the subtitle is displayed on the screen. However, if the audio is recorded on the disc, the subtitle is not displayed.
■ Language selection and language code list
Language code list
6565: Afar
6566: Abkhazian
6570: Afrikaans
6577: Ameharic
6582: Arabic
6583: Assamese
6588: Aymara
6590: Azerbaijani
6665: Bashkir
6669: Byelorussian
6671: Bulgarian
6672: Bihari
6678: Bengali; Bangla
6679: Tibetan
6682: Breton
6765: Catalan
6779: Corsican
6783: Czech
6789: Welsh
6865: Danish
6869: German
6890: Bhutani
6976: Greek
6978: English
6979: Esperanto
6983: Spanish
6984: Estonian
6985: Basque
7065: Persian
7073: Finnish
7074: Fiji
7079: Faroese
7082: French
7089: Frisian
7165: Irish
7168: Scots Gaelic
7176: Galician
7178: Guarani
7185: Gujarati
7265: Hausa
7273: Hindi
7282: Croatian
7285: Hungarian
7289: Armenian
7365: Interlingua
7378: Indonesian
7383: Icelandic
7384: Italian
7387: Hebrew
7465: Japanese
7473: Yiddish
7487: Javanese
7565: Georgian
7575: Kazakh
7576: Greenlandic
7577: Cambodian
7578: Kannada
7579: Korean
7583: Kashmiri
7585: Kurdish
7589: Kirghiz
7665: Latin
7678: Lingala
7679: Laotian
7684: Lithuanian
7686: Latvian, Lettish
7771: Malagasy
7773: Maori
7775: Macedonian
7776: Malayalam
7778: Mongolian
7779: Moldavian
7782: Marathi
7783: Malay
7784: Maltese
7789: Burmese
7865: Nauru
7869: Nepali
7876: Dutch
7879: Norwegian
7982: Oriya
8065: Punjabi
8076: Polish
8083: Pashto, Pushto
8084: Portuguese
8185: Quechua
8277: Rhaeto-Romance
8279: Romanian
8285: Russian
8365: Sanskrit
8368: Sindhi
8372: Serbo-Croatian
8373: Singhalese
8375: Slovak
8376: Slovenian
8377: Samoan
8378: Shona
8379: Somali
8381: Albanian
8382: Serbian
8385: Sundanese
8386: Swedish
8387: Swahili
8465: Tamil
8469: Telugu
8471: Tajik
8472: Thai
8473: Tigrinya
8475: Turkmen
8476: Tagalog
8479: Tonga
8482: Turkish
8484: Tatar
8487: Twi
8575: Ukrainian
8582: Urdu
8590: Uzbek
8673: Vietnamese
8679: Volapük
8779: Wolof
8872: Xhosa
8979: Yoruba
9072: Chinese
9085: Zulu
Note
• Selecting audio, subtitle or disc menu language is a disc-dependent matter. The language selected at the setup menu is not effective if
a disc does not have it.
107_S100_38-53_EN 02.5.13, 1:33 PM50
51
SETUP MENU
PLAYING A DISC
English
Ratings
DVD-V
Depending on software capability, you can prevent discs
or scenes with objectionable material from being played
according to your desired rating. You can select the level
and lock it by designating a password.
■ Setting method (Level 8)
1 Press SETUP while pressing SHIFT.
The menu screen appears on the video monitor.
2 Press d to select “Ratings” and press
ENTER.
3 Enter 4-digit number with numeric buttons
and press ENTER.
Press CANCEL if you want to re-enter other number.
The screen that confirms your password appears. Do
not forget your password.
4 Press ENTER.
When you select a disc that exceeds the rating you
have set, a message appears on the video monitor.
In that case, follow the procedure that appears on the
screen. You can go back to the previous screen by
pressing ENTER.
■ To change settings (Level 7 to 0)
When you select “Ratings” in the setup menu, the screen
where you enter a password is displayed.
1 Enter 4-digit number with numeric buttons
and press ENTER.
Unlock Player: unlocks the rating and returns to level
8.
Change Password: changes the password.
Change Level: changes the level of the rating.
Temporary Unlock: temporarily unlocks the level of
the rating. It will be kept unlocked until you switch
the input source, turn the power off, or open the disc
tray.
2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the
desired item and press ENTER.
■ If you have forgotten your
password
Return the setting to the factory setting. See page 47.
Note
• Not only the password setting but also all the other settings will
turn back to the factory settings.
PCM down conversion
DVD-A
DVD-V
Decide whether to output high-quality digital signals
(sampling frequency of 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) or not, in
accordance with the capability of the connected
component.
• If your A/V component is capable of handling high-rate
sampling frequency digital signals, select “No”.
• If not, select “Yes” so that digital output signals are
converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
Note
• If a disc is copyright protected or has a sampling frequency of
176.4 kHz or more, signals are automatically converted to
either 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
All DVDs can be played.
Level of restriction becomes severer as the
number gets smaller.
All DVDs cannot be played.
Level 8
Level 7 to 1
Level 0
SETUP
ENTER RETURN
Enter a 4-digit password,
then press ENTER.
Ratings
✱✱✱✱
Password
SELECT
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
u, d, j, i
/ ENTER
CANCEL
Numeric buttons
(U.S.A. model)
52
SETUP MENU
Speaker settings
DVD-A
DVD-V
When you adjust speakers while DISC DIRECT is
functioning, follow the procedures described below.
If you wish to enjoy multi-channel sound reproduction,
you need to select “Multi-channel” on the setup menu and
make following adjustments.
When you select “2-channel”, that is, when connecting to
only 2 speakers or a Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the
following adjustments are not necessary.
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
u, d, j, i
/ ENTER
(U.S.A. model)
SETUP
SELECT
ENTER RETURN
ms
ms
dB
0
dBdB
L
Exit
Test
LS
R
SW
C
RS
dB
0
0
0
0
0
Front (L)
Rear
(L) a
Subwoofer
(L) c b (R) c (R) a
Exit
Test signal
Center Front (R)
aab a c
b a
a Output mode
Change the settings of each speaker in accordance with
your speaker system.
1 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to
select a speaker and press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the
setting and press ENTER.
• Choices of the speaker size
L: Large, Small
R: Large, Small
C: Large, Small, None
SW: Used, Not used
LS: Large, Small, None
RS: Large, Small, None
The size of L is set to be the same as that of R.
Therefore, if you select Large for L, the size of R is
automatically set to Large. This also applies to the
sizes of LS and RS.
• Example: Rear left speaker
1 when the speaker is not used.
2 when using a large speaker capable of low-
frequency (under 100 Hz) output.
3 when using a small speaker that is not capable of
low-frequency output. (the included speakers,
NX-S100S etc.)
• Factory settings of the speaker sizes
L/R: Large
C/LS/RS: Large
SW: Used
LS
LS
123
53
SETUP MENU
PLAYING A DISC
English
b Delay time
(Only center/rear channels of the
DVD-Video discs recorded in the
Dolby Digital format)
To obtain the maximum effect of Dolby Digital 5.1
channel source, all speakers should be located at the same
distance from the listening position. However, in many
cases the center speaker is placed in line with the front
speakers, etc. You can virtually increase the distance of
the center and rear speakers by adjusting the delay time.
1 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to
select a “ms” box and press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to adjust the
delay time and press ENTER.
• Settings
Distance A, Distance B
=
>
Distance C: 0 ms
Distance A, Distance B < Distance C:
The following adjustments should be made.
c Speaker balance
You can adjust the output level of each effect speakers
(center, rear L/R) using the test tone.
1 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to
select “Test” and press ENTER.
The test tone is one speaker at a time in below order,
starting with the left front speaker.
2 Listening to the test tone, press the cursor
buttons (u, d) to adjust the volume of effect
speakers and press ENTER.
The value in the “dB” box changes.
Note
• The subwoofer cannot output the test tone. Play
something and return to this screen to adjust the output
level of the subwoofer.
■ To exit the speaker setting mode
Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to select “EXIT”
and press ENTER.
Notes
• When DISC DIRECT is functioning, adjust the settings of the
speakers on the SETUP MENU screen. However, when it is not
functioning, follow the procedure in “ADJUSTING SPEAKER
OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 20 to adjust the settings.
• These adjustments may not be effective when the disc’s
original sound design is protected. P.PCM indicator lights up or
D.MIX indicator turns off in that case.
Difference
Approx. 50 cm (1 1/2 feet)
Approx. 100 cm (3 feet)
Approx. 150 cm (5 feet)
Approx. 200 cm (6 feet)
Setting
1.3 ms
2.6 ms
3.9 ms
5.3 ms
Center speaker
Difference
Approx. 200 cm (6 feet)
Approx. 400 cm (12 feet)
Approx. 600 cm (18 feet)
Setting
5.3 ms
10.6 ms
15.9 ms
Rear speakers
LS
RS
L
R
SW
C
Distance C
Distance B
Distance A
Listening
position
LCR RSLS
54
TUNING
C1:AM 630 kHz
TUNER
SP
Indication on the front panel (example)
Preset station
number
Reception band
Station frequencyColon
*1
Preset station
group
*1
The colon (:) lights up in the preset mode and goes off in the tuning
mode.
Automatic and manual tuning
There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
■ Automatic tuning
1 Press INPUT H / G (TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press PRESET/BAND to select the reception
band. (“FM” or “AM”)
Each time PRESET/BAND is pressed, the mode
changes as follows:
FM (Tuning mode) ^ AM (Tuning mode) ^ (Preset
mode) ^ FM (Tuning mode) ^ ...
y
• Make sure that the colon (:) turns off when the mode switches
to the tuning mode.
3 Press AUTO/MAN’L so that the “AUTO”
indicator lights up on the front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING u / d once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press u to tune in to a higher frequency, or press d
to tune in to a lower frequency.
y
• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not
stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.
• When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up
and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front
panel display.
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L
DISC DIRECT
SILENT
PRESET/BAND AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT H / G
PRESET/TUNING
u / d
■ Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune in to it manually.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 described in
“Automatic tuning” at left.
2 Press AUTO/MAN’L so that the “AUTO”
indicator goes off from the front panel
display.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING u / d to tune in to
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue the tuning search.
y
• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change
the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.
TUNING
55
TUNING
English
Presetting stations
■ Automatically presetting stations
(for FM stations)
This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to
FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8
stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature
enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by
selecting the preset station number.
1 Press PRESET/BAND to select the FM band.
2 Press AUTO/MAN’L so that the “AUTO”
indicator lights up on the front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY for more than
3 seconds.
The preset number and the “MEMORY” and
“AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about
5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the
frequency currently displayed toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
• When a station data is stored under a preset number, the
frequency and reception band are also stored.
• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or
AM station by simply following the procedure in the section
“Exchanging preset stations” on page 56.
• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually
in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure
in “Manually presetting stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset group and number from which
this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward
lower or higher frequencies.
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 described in
“Automatically presetting stations (for FM
stations)” on the left.
(After keeping MEMORY pressed for more than 3
seconds)
2 Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u / d
to select the preset number under which the
first station will be stored.
Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have
all been stored up to E8.
3 Press PRESET/BAND to turn off the colon (:)
and then press PRESET/TUNING u / d.
When pressing d, automatic preset tuning begins
from the frequency currently displayed toward the
lower frequencies, and when pressing u, it begins
toward the higher ones.
■ Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5
groups) manually.
1 Tune in to a station.
See page 54 for tuning instructions.
When tuned in to a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of received station.
2 Press MEMORY.
The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about
5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”
indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears and make sure that the
colon (:) appears on the front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING u / d to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.
Press u to select a higher preset station number.
Press d to select a lower preset station number.
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L
DISC DIRECT
SILENT
PRESET/BAND MEMORY
AUTO/MAN'LPRESET/TUNING
u / d
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
56
Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations.
The example below describes the procedure for
exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u / d.
See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left.
2 Press and hold PRESET/BAND for more than
3 seconds.
“E1” appears and the “MEMORY” indicator flashes
on the front panel display.
3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u / d.
“A5” appears and the “MEMORY” indicator flashes
on the front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/BAND again.
“EDIT E1-A5” appears on the front panel display,
and then the preset stations are exchanged.
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
ABCDE
PRESET u, d
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L
DISC DIRECT
SILENT
PRESET/BAND
PRESET/TUNING
u / d
A/B/C/D/E
5 Press MEMORY on the front panel while the
“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear on the front
panel display with the preset group and number you
have selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
Tuning in to a preset station
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
1 Press ABCDE (A/B/C/D/E on the front panel)
to select the preset station group.
The preset group letter appears on the front panel
display and changes each time you press ABCDE.
2 Press PRESET u / d (PRESET/TUNING
u/ d on the front panel) to select a preset
station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band and
frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.
(U.S.A. model)
108_S100_54-56_EN 02.5.13, 1:34 PM56
57
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
English
OPERATING OTHER COMPONENTS USING THE REMOTE CONTROL
Setting the manufacturer code (remote control signal
assigned to each manufacturer) for your TV, VCR or MD/
CD recorder on the remote control allows you to operate
not only the DVX-S100 but also your TV, VCR or MD/
CD recorder using the remote control.
Note
• Depending on the model, certain components from other
manufacturers cannot be controlled, or only limited functions
can be controlled, even though the proper manufacturer code
has been set. If you encounter this problem, please use the
remote control supplied with the component.
Setting the manufacturer code
Manufacturer codes can be set for TV, VCR and MD/
CD-R buttons only.
Note
• TV manufacturer codes can be set for the TV button only.
However, any of the manufacturer codes can be set for the VCR
and MD/CD-R buttons.
1 While pressing CODE SET, press the input
selector button (TV, VCR, MD/CD-R) for which
the manufacturer code is to be set.
Only one manufacturer code can be set for each input
selector button.
Note
• Keep pressing CODE SET between step 1 and 2.
• Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S
CODES” at the end of this manual.
2 Keeping CODE SET pressed, enter the 1-
digit device code and the 2-digit
manufacturer code for the component to be
controlled using the numeric buttons.
You can release CODE SET after entering the code.
y
• The manufacturer code 99 has been set for the remote control
selector buttons (TV, VCR and MD/CD-R) at the factory.
3 Press POWER (TV or AV) and check that the
component to be controlled turns on and off
(standby).
Precautions when performing the setting
You can operate the component using the TV, VCR or
MD/CD-R operation buttons on the remote control once
the manufacturer code is set properly. If unsuccessful,
perform the procedure from step 1 again. Pay attention to
the following points when you perform the procedure.
• Check that the correct remote control selector button
has been selected when setting the manufacturer code.
• If more than one code is given for a manufacturer, try
entering each code in the order given.
• Remove and replace the remote control’s batteries
(complete this step within 2 minutes) and then perform
the procedure. While replacing the batteries, be sure not
to press any button on the remote control. Doing so
may erase the manufacturer code which has been set
for other remote control selector buttons.
To reset the manufacturer code to the
factory-set code
Follow steps 1 to 2 for the procedure “Setting the
manufacturer code”, and enter the device code for the
component and “99” while pressing CODE SET in step 2.
(It is not necessary to follow step 3.)
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
CH
PRESET
CH
CODE SET
TV
AV
MD/CD-R
VCR
Numeric buttons
(U.S.A. model)
OPERATING OTHER COMPONENTS USING THE REMOTE CONTROL
58
TV
CH
INPUT
TUNER
MUTE CD–R
VCR
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 1
MD
AV
SLEEP
POWER
TV MODE
POWER
VOL
REC
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
PRESET
PRESET
CHCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
■ Table of control buttons
When you press the input selector button for which a
manufacturer code has been set, many buttons on the
remote control function differently to operate each
component as shown in the table below.
When you press the TV button, the TV is automatically
turned on. The AV components such as VCR are turned
on when you press the AV button after pressing the
corresponding input selector buttons.
1 AV
2 TV
3 TV CH +
TV CH –
TV VOL +
TV VOL –
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
4 *
4
REC
w
e
r
d
t
y
a
5 1-9, 0, ≥10
6 CH +
CH –
VCR
*
1
Power
*
2
TV power
*
2
TV channel up
*
2
TV channel down
*
2
TV volume up
*
2
TV volume down
*
2
TV mute
*
2
TV input
Rec
Play
Search backward
Search forward
Pause
–
–
Stop
–
VCR channel up
VCR channel down
TV
*
3
VCR power
TV power
TV channel up
TV channel down
TV volume up
TV volume down
TV mute
TV input
*
3
VCR rec
*
3
VCR play
*
3
VCR search backward
*
3
VCR search forward
*
3
VCR pause
–
–
*
3
VCR stop
–
–
–
CD/MD recorder
*
1
Power
*
2
TV power
*
2
TV channel up
*
2
TV channel down
*
2
TV volume up
*
2
TV volume down
*
2
TV mute
*
2
TV input
Rec (MD)
Play
Search backward
Search forward
Pause
Skip backward
Skip forward
Stop
Numeric buttons
–
–
Control
button
Component
*
1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button.
*
2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in TV.
*
3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in input selector buttons
(except TV).
*
4
Only when pressing this button twice in quick succession within one second, the button functions.
y
• If the manufacturer code of TV has been set for the TV button, the control buttons 2 and 3 can also operate your TV even if any
input selector button is pressed.
(U.S.A. model)
59
English
ADJUSTMENTS
Adjusting the items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Note
• Some items require extra steps.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item you
want to adjust (1 to 9).
y
• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the
same order as when pressing d.
4 Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of
the selected item.
The last setting you adjusted appears on the front
panel display.
Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub
item.
5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting
of the item.
6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu
disappears or simply press one of the DSP
program buttons to exit SET MENU.
SET MENU
The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker
mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or
select the values as necessary.
y
• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
List of SET MENU items
Items Initial settings
1 SPEAKER SET
A CENTER SML (small)
B FRONT SMALL
C REAR LR SML (small)
D BASS SWFR
E F. Level Nrm (Normal)
2 LFE LEVEL
SP LFE 0 dB
HP LFE 0 dB
3 SP DLY TIME 0 ms
4 D. RANGE
SP D.R MAX
HP D.R MAX
5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R
6 HP TONE CTRL
HP BASS 0 dB
HP TRBL 0 dB
7 I/O ASSIGN
[A] OPTICAL INPUT VIDEO 1
[B] COAXIAL INPUT MD/CD-R
8 INPUT MODE AUTO
9 SP/PRE OUT SP
In the descriptions for each item from the following page,
the default setting is indicated in bold.
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
PRESET
CH
j, i
AMP
SET MENU
u, d
DSP program
buttons
(U.S.A. model)
SET MENU
60
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
If you do not use one or any of the included speakers, or
if you use other speakers instead of the included speakers,
set the following.
Note
• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,
some items are not affected.
■ 1A CENTER (center speaker
mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
this unit can provide better dialog localization for several
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and
images.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D
BASS”.
NON
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signals are directed to the front left and
right speakers.
■ 1B FRONT (front speaker mode)
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
LARGE
Select this if you have large front speakers. The entire
range of the front left and right channel signal is directed
to the front left and right speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small front speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the front channel
are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”.
Note
• When you select FRONT for “1D BASS”, the low-frequency
signals (90 Hz and below) of the front channel are directed to
the front speakers even if you select SMALL for the front
speaker mode.
■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode)
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
LRG
Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or
if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the
rear left and right speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers.
The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D
BASS”.
NON
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you
select NON for “1C REAR LR”.
SET MENU
61
English
ADJUSTMENTS
■ 1D BASS (LFE/bass out mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-
frequency signals can be directed to both front left and
right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used
for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
FRONT
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals
are directed to the front speakers.
BOTH
The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Low-
frequency signals designated to the front channels in
accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed
to both front speakers and a subwoofer.
■ 1E F. Level (front level mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level
of the center and rear (L/R) speakers with that of the front
speakers because of unusually high-efficiency
performance from the front speakers.
Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB
Nrm
Select this if you can match the output level of the center
and rear speakers with that of the front speakers when
using the test tone.
–10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of the
effect speakers with that of the front speakers when using
the test tone.
2 LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a
Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Adjust the LFE level
according to the capacity of your subwoofer or
headphones.
Control range:
SPEAKER
(SP LFE) ............. –20 to 0 dB
HEADPHONE
(HP LFE) ............. –20 to 0 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
1 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted.
2 Press j to adjust the LFE level.
SET MENU
62
L
C
C
R
RL
RR
3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay
time)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel
sounds. This feature works when there is sound output
from the center speaker, with a source like Dolby Digital
or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker should be the
same distance from the main listening position as the left
and right speakers.
However, in most home situations, the center speaker is
placed in line with the front speakers. By delaying the
sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from
the center speaker to the main listening position can be
adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance
between the front left and right speaker to the listening
position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker
is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue.
Control range:
CENTER ............. 0 to 5 ms
Initial setting:
CENTER ............. 0 ms
Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay
of the center channel sounds.
y
• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position.
Center speaker image
4 D. RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting
is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital
signals.
Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum)
MAX
Select the “MAX” for feature films.
STD
Select the “STD” for general use.
MIN
Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
Note
• Some types of the Dolby Digital software do not support
“MIN” for the dynamic range. If “MIN” is selected to play this
type of software, the volume may be extremely lowered fall
greatly, sharply. If this happens, select “MAX” or “STD”.
5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the
front left and right speakers)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level
from the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 20 steps each for L/R
Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R
Press i to decrease the output level for the
front left speaker. Press j for the front right
speaker.
6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone
control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB):
BASS................... –6 to +3
TRBL (treble) ..... –6 to +3
Initial setting:
BASS................... 0 dB
TRBL .................. 0 dB
Press i to increase the level of the bass and treble, and
press j to decrease the level.
SET MENU
63
English
ADJUSTMENTS
7 I/O ASSIGN (input assignment)
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component
to be used if this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jack settings
(component names for jacks) differ from that component.
This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and
effectively connect more components.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT H / G on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control).
■ [A] OPTICAL INPUT jack
Choices: VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR, MD/CD-R
■ [B] COAXIAL INPUT jack
Choices: VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR, MD/CD-R
Note
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
8 INPUT MODE (initial input
mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the digital input jacks when you turn on this
unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the
type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for the respective source.
9 SP/PRE OUT (output source
settings)
Choices: SP, PRE
SP
Select this to direct signals to the speakers connected to
the subwoofer (SW-S100). (No sound is output from 6CH
PREOUT jacks.)
PRE
Select this to direct signals to 6CH PREOUT jacks or if
you connect your external amplifier to 6CH PREOUT
jacks on this unit. (No sound is output from the speakers
connected to the subwoofer (SW-S100).)
110_S100_59-66_EN 02.5.13, 1:35 PM63
64
You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker
(center, rear left and right, and subwoofer) while listening
to a source.
(While playing a source)
1 Press AMP.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker
changes and appears on the front panel display as
follows: center, rear right, rear left and subwoofer.
CENTER (Center speaker) ^ R SUR. (Rear right
speaker) ^ L SUR.(Rear left speaker) ^ SWFR
(Subwoofer) ^ CENTER (Center speaker)...
y
• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to
be adjusted by pressing d / u.
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
• The control range for the center or rear left and
right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
• The control range for the subwoofer is from
+10 dB to –10 dB.
Notes
• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C
REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1D BASS” to FRONT, the
output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there
is no sound coming from these speakers.
• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you
made with the test tone will be changed.
• We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps
described in “Using the test tone” on page 20.
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS
■ For 5ch Stereo
You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 5-
channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Initial Setting: 100%
• CT level (Center level)
• RL level (Rear left level)
• RR level (Rear right level)
(While playing a source)
1 Press AMP.
2 Press “4” button to select 5ch Stereo.
3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
4 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
Notes
• During the 5ch Stereo mode, the output level adjusted with the
test tone or LEVEL is replaced with the level adjusted in the
5-channel stereo mode.
• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C
REAR LR” are set to NON, the output level of those speakers
cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from
these speakers.
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
AMP
j, i
u, d
LEVEL
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
AMP
4
j, i
u, d
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
65
English
ADJUSTMENTS
Adjusting the delay time
You can adjust the time difference between the beginning
of the sound from the front speakers and the beginning of
the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the
value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay
time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs.
(While playing a source)
1 Press AMP.
2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the
delay time.
3 Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the
front panel display.
4 Press j / i to adjust the delay time.
Notes
• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with
some sources.
• The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay
time.
(U.S.A. model)
CHANGING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR DSP PROGRAMS
The following table shows factory-set delay time.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Program
CONCERT HALL
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT
DISCO
GAME
CONCERT VIDEO
TV SPORTS
MONO MOVIE
70 mm SPECTACLE
DGTL SPECTACLE
DTS SPECTACLE
Spectacle 6.1
70 mm SCI-FI
Sci-Fi 6.1
DGTL SCI-FI
DTS SCI-FI
70 mm ADVENTURE
DGTL ADVENTURE
DTS ADVENTURE
Adventure 6.1
70 mm GENERAL
DGTL GENERAL
DTS GENERAL
General 6.1
PRO LOGIC/NORMAL
DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL
DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL
Matrix 6.1
PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED
DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED
DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED
Enhanced 6.1
PRO LOGIC II Movie
PRO LOGIC II Music
Preset value (ms)
45
30
15
26
36
21
10
69
23
15
15
15
20
15
15
15
20
15
15
15
20
15
15
15
15
5
5
5
20
5
5
5
15
5
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
AMP
j, i
u, d
DSP program
buttons
CHANGING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR DSP PROGRAMS
66
Adjusting the parameter settings for PRO LOGIC II Music
■ Changing parameter settings
You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC II Music
parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in
your listening room.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press the numeric buttons 9 and 0
repeatedly to select PRO LOGIC II Music.
3 Press u / d to select the parameter.
4 Press j / i to change the parameter value.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to
change other parameters.
■ PRO LOGIC II Music parameter
descriptions
PANORAMA
Function: Turning the function on extends the front
stereo image to include the surround
speakers for wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.
DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either
towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the
front), initial setting is STD (standard).
CT WIDTH (Center width)
Function: Adjusts the center image from the center
and front speakers to varying degrees. The
larger the value, adjusts the center image
towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only
from center speaker) to 7 (center channel
sound is output only from front left and
right speakers), initial setting is 3.
(U.S.A. model)
VIDEO 1
SHIFT
CODE SET
1
HALL
2
JAZZ
SETUP
3
ROCK
ANGLE
4
ENTERTAINMENT
MARKER
5
SPORTS
6
MONO MOVIE
PLAY MODE
7
MOVIE 1
REPEAT
8
MOVIE 2
A–B
DVD
CD
AMP
9
/DTS
TOP MENU
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
B. BOOST
RETURN
0
SELECT
>
–
10
MATRIX 6.1
GROUP
CANCEL
STEREO
PAGE
MUTE
VOL
ABCDE
ENTER
CH
PRESET
CH
PRESET
AMP
9, 0
j, i
u, d
67
APPENDIX
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are having is not listed below or if
the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or POWER ( ))
is pressed, or enters
in the standby mode
soon after the power
has been turned on.
No sound.
The picture does not
appear.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Sound can be heard
only from the front
speakers.
Cause
The power cord is not connected or the plug
is not completely inserted.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning and
strong static electricity).
Incorrect input or output cable connections.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
The speaker connections are not secure.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
The source that this unit cannot reproduce,
such as a CD-ROM, is being played.
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video jacks.
The sleep timer has functioned.
Incorrect cable connections.
The sound effect is off.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
decoding DSP program is being used with
material not encoded with Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital or DTS.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being
input to this unit.
Remedy
Firmly connect the power cord.
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect
the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds,
then start operating.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
Select an appropriate input source with the
input selector buttons.
Secure the connections.
Turn up the volume.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this
unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Play a source whose signals this unit can
reproduce.
Make connections using the same type of video
jacks (S VIDEO or VIDEO (composite)) for
both the input and output.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
Press STEREO to turn it on.
Select another DSP program.
When a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being
input to this unit, sound is output from the front
speakers only.
Refer
to page
—
—
14 – 19
21
17 – 18
21
21
—
14
22
17 – 18
27
23 – 24
27
TROUBLESHOOTING
68
Problem
No sound from the
center speaker.
No sound from the
rear speakers.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
Poor bass
reproduction.
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording
component
connected to the
digital output jack of
this unit.
This unit does not
operate properly.
There is noise
interference from
digital or high-
frequency equipment,
or this unit.
Cause
The output level of the center speaker is set to
minimum.
“1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to
NON.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has
been selected (except for 5ch Stereo).
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal does not have a center channel
signal.
The output level of the rear speakers is set to
minimum.
A monaural source is being played with
program 9.
“1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to
FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal
is being played.
“1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or FRONT when a 2-channel source is
being played.
The source does not contain low bass signals
(90 Hz and below).
The speaker mode settings (front, center, or
rear) on the SET MENU do not match your
speaker configuration.
Incorrect cable connections.
The component connected to the OUT (Rec)
jacks of this unit is turned off.
It is not possible to record the sound effect by
a recording component.
A source component is not connected to the
digital input jacks of this unit.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen
by an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or by
a power supply with low voltage.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Remedy
Raise the level of the center speaker.
Select the appropriate mode for your center
speaker.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
Select another DSP program.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
Select BOTH.
Select the appropriate position for each speaker
based on the size of the speakers in your
configuration.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
Turn on the power to the component.
Connect the source component to the digital
input jacks of this unit.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
Refer
to page
64
60
23 – 24
—
64
23 – 24
61
61
—
60 – 61
14 – 15
—
—
14 – 15
—
—
111_S100_67-75_EN 02.5.13, 1:36 PM68
TROUBLESHOOTING
69
APPENDIX
English
Problem
No response when
buttons pressed.
Playback does not
start.
Alternative
languages fail to be
selected.
No subtitles.
Angle cannot be
changed.
No sound.
Distorted sound.
Sound “skips”.
Noise from inside of
the unit.
Picture distorted
during SEARCH.
No picture.
Picture appears
incorrectly.
Cause
Some operations may be prohibited by the
disc.
The disc is damaged.
There is moisture on the laser pickup.
The disc has been loaded upside down.
The disc is dirty.
An alternative language is not selected with
discs which do not contain more than one
language.
In the case of some discs, the alternative
language cannot be selected with “Audio” or
“Subtitle”. Try selecting it from the disc’s
menu if one is available.
The disc does not have subtitles.
Subtitle is turned off.
The disc or the scene being played does not
support multi-angle.
If the “D.MIX” indicator on the front panel
display goes out while playing a multi-
channel DVD-Audio disc, sound will only be
output from speakers specified by the disc.
The disc is dirty.
The disc may be warped.
Some distortion is normal during SEARCH.
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
If you play PAL system DVD-Audio, “This
disc is PAL system. The output is sound
only” may appear on the monitor. Picture is
not available because the disc’s video signal
system is different.
Incorrect “TV aspect” setting.
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
PROGRESSIVE is turned on even though the
connected monitor cannot receive the
progressive signals.
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Due to the editing method or material used on
a DVD, ghosting may occur with progressive
output.
Remedy
Check the disc carefully; replace it if necessary.
Wait 1 to 2 hours after switching the unit on
before trying to play a disc.
Reload the disc with the label side facing up.
Clean the disc.
Show subtitles by pressing SUBTITLE or using
on-screen menu.
Clean the disc.
Replace the disc.
Select the right position. However, it may be
difficult to adjust many DVD-Videos’
widescreen format to fit perfectly in your 4:3
video monitor.
Turn off the PROGRESSIVE feature.
Turn off the PROGRESSIVE feature.
Refer
to page
—
—
—
—
30
—
—
—
35
—
—
30
—
—
—
48
38 – 39
38 – 39
■ Disc playback
111_S100_67-75_EN 02.5.13, 1:36 PM69
TROUBLESHOOTING
70
Problem
No on-screen
display.
On-Screen Menu
Icons not displayed
or only partially
displayed on the
television.
There is a lot of
ghosting.
“No Play” appears
on the unit’s display.
This unit does not
recognize disc (“No
disc” appears on the
display, or the
display shows the
status when no disc
is loaded).
Cause
The disc that this unit cannot play is loaded.
The disc is not placed properly.
Remedy
Go to Display on the SETUP menu, and select
“On” for “On-Screen Messages”.
Press the cursor buttons (u,d) while the
rightmost icon is highlighted to change the
menu bar position.
Use the on-screen menu icons to adjust the
picture quality.
Place the disc properly.
Refer
to page
49
34
37
—
—
111_S100_67-75_EN 02.5.13, 1:37 PM70
TROUBLESHOOTING
71
APPENDIX
English
■ Tuner
Previously preset
stations cannot be
tuned in.
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
There are buzzing and
whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
Problem
FM/
AM
FM
AM
Cause
The preset stations are cleared.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
There is multipath interference.
The station is too weak.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Remedy
Pre-set the stations once again.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
Move this unit away from the TV.
Refer
to page
55
16
54
16
16
54
16
54
16
—
■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Cause
Wrong distance or angle.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
The batteries are weak.
The manufacture code is not correctly
set.
Even if the manufacturer code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Remedy
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Reposition this unit.
Replace all batteries with new ones.
Set the code correctly.
Try setting another code of the same
manufacturer.
Operate the component using its remote
control.
Refer
to page
7
—
3
57
57
—
72
GLOSSARY
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multiple channel audio data
(eg., 5.1 channel) before it is decoded into its various
channels.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and
designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and
so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are
differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth
of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
P
B
/C
B
and P
R
/C
R
signals for the chrominance. Color can
be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in
order to use the component signal for output.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded signals on DVDs to normal.
This is called decoding.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by
Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio,
these signals can also be 5.1-channel audio. A large
amount of audio information can be recorded on one disc
using this method.
Dolby Pro Logic
A surround system where a 4-channel audio track is
recorded as 2 channels and then is restored to 4 channels
for play. The surround channel is monaural and can
reproduce up to 7 kHz.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround
software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-
channel playback with 2 front channels, 1 center channel,
and 2 rear channels (instead of only 1 rear channel for
conventional Pro Logic technology). A music mode is
also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the
movie mode.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters
around the world. There is good separation between the
channels, so realistic sound effects are possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level
of sound that can be heard above the noise of the
equipment and the highest level of sound before distortion
occurs.
Film and video
DVDs are recorded using either film or video. Film is
recorded at 24 frames per second, the rate movies are
filmed at, although some recent progressive material is
recorded at 30 frames per second.
Video is recorded at 30 frames per second.
Frame still and field still
A still is shown when you pause a moving picture. A
frame still is made up of two alternating fields, so the
picture may appear blurred, but overall quality is high.
A field still is not blurred, but it has only half the
information of a frame still so picture quality is lower.
Frames are the still pictures that go together to make a
moving picture.
There are about 30 frames shown each second.
One frame is made up of two fields. A regular television
shows these fields one after the other to create frames.
Group
A DVD audio disc is divided into large sections called
“groups” and smaller sections called “tracks”. The
numbers allocated to these sections are called “group
numbers” and “track numbers”.
GLOSSARY
73
APPENDIX
English
Matrix 6.1
The unit incorporates Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby
Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to
existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is
created from rear left and right channels, and outputted
from virtual rear center speaker.) With this additional
channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic
moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and
“fly-around” effects.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention
that they are viewed on a widescreen television with an
aspect ratio of 16:9. This means you can view most
material with the intended aspect ratio on a widescreen
television.
Material with this ratio will not fit onto a standard
television with an aspect ratio of 4:3. Two styles of
picture, “Pan&Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this
problem.
Pan&Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture fills the
screen.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and bottom of
the picture so the picture itself appears in an
aspect ratio of 16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has “playback control” written on it or its
jacket, it means that particular scenes or information can
be selected for viewing interactively with the television
using the menu screen. This unit can play Video CDs with
playback control.
Using menus to control play of a Video CD is called
“menu play” in these operating instructions.
Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
Interlace and progressive output
NTSC, the video signal standard, has 525 interlaced (i)
scan lines, whereas progressive scanning uses twice the
number of scan lines.
This is called 525p. The 525i video signals output from
this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals (Y, P
B
/
C
B
, P
R
/C
R
) allow you to enjoy higher quality pictures than
if the signals were output from the video output terminal
or S VIDEO OUT terminal. The COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT terminals are also able to handle 525p
(progressive) video signals which are of even greater
resolution.
I/P/B
MPEG, the video compression standard adopted for use
with DVD-Video, codes frames using these 3 picture
types.
I: Intra coded picture (I-picture)
This is the standard picture and is a complete picture
in itself.
This means it has the best picture quality and is the
best to use when adjusting the picture.
P: Predictive coded picture (P-picture)
This picture is calculated based on past I or P-
pictures.
B: Bidirectionally-predictive coded picture (B-picture)
This picture is calculated by comparing past and
future I and P-pictures so it has the lowest volume of
information.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1 channel systems.
Linear PCM (pulse code modulation)
PCM is the usual digital method used for music CDs.
DVDs have a greater volume so they use linear PCM,
which has a higher sampling rate. Compressed PCM
signals are called packed PCM (PPCM).
GLOSSARY
74
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed using headphones.
S video signal
With the S video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Title/Chapter
DVD-Video are divided up into large sections, titles, and
smaller sections, chapters. The numbers allocated to these
sections are called title numbers and chapter numbers.
Track
This is the smallest division on DVD-Audio, CD, and
Video CD, and usually equates to a single song.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without center or rear speakers by
using virtual rear speakers.
75
APPENDIX
English
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power
FRONT L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ........................................................ 33 W
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ..................................... 25 W
SUBWOOFER
100 Hz, 0.9% THD, 5 Ω ...................................................... 40 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
FRONT L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
............................................................................................ 40 W
SUBWOOFER (100 Hz, 10% THD, 5 Ω)
............................................................................................ 50 W
• Total Harmonic Distortion
FRONT L/R (20 W, 1 kHz) ................................................ 0.05 %
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network, shorted) .................... 95 dB
• Input Sensitivity
VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR, MD/CD-R .................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level (when 200 mV is input.)
PRE OUT (FRONT L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R) ........... max. 1 V
PRE OUT (SUBWOOFER) ............................................ max. 4 V
REC OUT .............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
Headphones ............................................................ 165 mV/100 Ω
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Level
Video .......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S Video (Y/C)
[U.S.A., Canada and General models] .... 1 Vp-p/0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .......... 1 Vp-p/0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component (Y/P
B
,
P
R
)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Australia models]
.................................................................. 1 Vp-p/0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................ 50 dB
TUNER SECTION
• FM Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] .................................................. 87.5 to 108.0 MHz
• AM Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 530 to 1710 kHz
[U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................. 531 to 1611 kHz
[General model] ................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
SPEAKER SECTION
• Front and Rear Speakers
Model Name ................................................................. NX-S100S
Type ................................................................... 2-way Bass reflex
Speakers
............. 10 cm (4 inch) cone, 1.9 cm (3/4 inch) balanced dome,
magnetically shielded
Impedance ................................................................................ 6 Ω
• Center Speaker
Model Name ................................................................. NX-S100C
Type ................................................................... 2-way Bass reflex
Speakers .............. 7 cm (3 inch) cone x 3, 1.5 cm (5/8 inch) piezo,
magnetically shielded
Impedance ................................................................................ 6 Ω
• Subwoofer
Model Name .................................................................... SW-S100
Type ........ Advanced YAMAHA Active Servo Technology system
Speaker ............ 16 cm (6-1/2 inch) woofer, magnetically shielded
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz
[General model] ........................................... AC 220/240 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
DVR-S100 ............................................................................. 40 W
SW-S100 .............................................................................. 160 W
• Standby Power Consumption
DVR-S100
[General model] .................................................................... 0.5 W
[Other models] ...................................................................... 0.4 W
• Laser pickup
Wave length ........................................................................ 665 nm
Laser power .................................................................... CLASS II
Laser output ........................................Max. 1.0 mW (Continuous)
Output value determined by 21 CFR CHAPTER1,
SUBCHAPTER J
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
DVR-S100 ....................................................... 435 x 84 x 360 mm
(17-1/8” x 3-3/8” x 14-3/16”)
SW-S100 ........................................................ 200 x 395 x 416 mm
(7-7/8” x 15-1/2” x 16-3/8”)
NX-S100C ....................................................... 440 x 85 x 122 mm
(17-3/8” x 3-3/8” x 4-7/16”)
NX-S100S ....................................................... 120 x 250 x 92 mm
(4-3/4” x 9-7/8” x 3-5/8”)
• Weight
DVR-S100 ............................................................................. 6.0kg
(13 lbs 4 oz)
SW-S100 .............................................................................. 10.7kg
(23 lbs 9 oz)
NX-S100C ............................................................................. 1.7kg
(3 lbs 12 oz)
NX-S100S ............................................................................. 1.1kg
(2 lbs 6 oz)
• Usable temperature range .............................................. 5°C to 35°C
• Usable humidity range
.......................... 5% to 90% (There should be no condensation.)
• Accessories .............................................................. Refer to page 3.
111_S100_67-75_EN 02.5.13, 1:37 PM75
LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES
TV
(Device Code: 2)
Yamaha 99 92
Admiral 92 93
Aiwa 94 76
Akai 95 96
Alba 96
AOC 97
BellÅïHowell 92
Bestar 98
Blaupunkt 29 22
Blue sky 98
Brandt 23
Brocsonic 97
Bush 96
Clatronic 98
Craig 24
Croslex 25
Curtis Mathis 97 26
Daewoo 97 98 24 27 28
Daytron 39
Dual 98
Emerson 97 24 39 32
Ferguson 23 65 66
First line 98
Funai 77 78
Fisher 95 33
Fraba 98
GE 93 97 34 35 36
Goodmans 96 98 23
Grundig 29 38 49
Hitachi 97 39 42 43
ICE 96
Irradio 96
Itt/Nokia 44 45
JC Penny 93 97 34 37
JVC 96 46 47
Kendo 98
KTV 97 39
LG (Goldstar) 97 98 39 37
Loewe 98 48
LXI 93 97 25 26 33
Magnavox 97 25 39
Matsui 95
Mitsubishi 99 97 59
NEC 97 52 82
Nokia 44 45
Nokia Oceanic 45
Nordmende 65 66
Onwa 96
Panasonic 34 35 36 53
Philco 97 25 39
Philips 25
Pioneer 26 35 54 55 68
Portland 97 56
Quasar 34 35
Radio Shack 99 93 97
RCA 93 97 34 56 57 58
SABA 23 69 65 66
Samsung 97 39 48 62 75
Sanyo 95 33 79 72 73 74
Schneider 96
Scott 97
Sharp 92 39 32
Siemens 29
Signature 92
Sony 63
Sylvania 97 25
Telefunken 69 64 65 66
Thomson 23 66
Toshiba 92 26 67
Videch 97 42
Wards 97 39 32
VCR
(Device Code: 3)
Yamaha 99 92 93 94
Admiral 95
Aiwa 96 97 98 29
Akai 22 23 24
Audio Dynamic 92 94
BellÅïHowell 93
Blaupunkt 25 26
Brocsonic 27
Bush 22
Canon 25 28
CGM 96 32
Citizen 96
Craig 96
Curtis Mathis 97 28 33
Daewoo 28 34 35
DBX 92 94
Dimensia 33
Emerson 27 34
Fisher 93 36
Funai 97 88
GE 28 33
Goodmans 34 37
Grundig 32 38
Hitachi 25 33 49 42 43
Instant Replay 25 28
Itt/Nokia 93
JC Penny 92 93 94 28 33 49
JVC 92 94 44 45 46 47
Kendo 96
Kenwood 92 94 96
LG (Goldstar) 96
Loewe 96 37
Luxor 95
LXI 93 96 97 36 49
Magnavox 25 26 28
Marantz 92 94
Marta 96
Matsui 96
Memorex 28 36
Minolta 33 49
Mitsubishi 99 44 48 59 52 53
Multitech 97 48 54
NEC 92 94 44 83
Nokia 93 95
Nokia Oceanic 95
Okano 23
Olympic 25 28
Orion 27
Panasonic 25 28 39 55 78 84 85
Pentax 33 49
Philco 25 28
Philips 25 26 28 37 56 57
Phonola 37
Pioneer 25
Quasar 25 28
RCA/PROSCAN 25 26 28 33 35 49 58 69
I
Realistic 93 97 28 36 59 62
Samsung 54 58 63 64 65 66
Sansui 94
Sanyo 93 36 67
Schneider 37
Scott 99 35 36 48 59 52 54 58
Seleco 22
Sharp 95 62 82
Siemens 93
Signature 2000 95 97
Sony 68 79 72 73 74 75
Sylvania 97 25 26 28
Symphonic 97
Tandberg 34
Tashiro 96
Tatung 92 94
Teac 92 94 97
Technics 25 28
Telefunken 76 77
Thorn 93 96
Toshiba 35 69 89
Universum 96 27 76
W.WHouse 96
Wards 95 96 36 62
CDR
(Device Code: 4)
Yamaha 99
Sony 27
DENON 22 23
JVC 25
Kenwood 22
Pioneer 26
Marantz 22
Philips 22
Hitachi 24
MD
(Device Code: 5)
Yamaha 99 98 22
Sony 22
Denon 23 24
JVC 25
Kenwood 26
Pioneer 27
Sharp 28
II
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
V883340-1
DVD HOME THEATER SOUND SYSTEM
DVX-S100
DVX-S100: DVR-S100 + NX-S100S + NX-S100C + SW-S100
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
101_S100_H14(U)3.2mm 02.5.13, 2:11 PM1
Transcripción de documentos
U DVD HOME THEATER SOUND SYSTEM DVX-S100 DVX-S100: DVR-S100 + NX-S100S + NX-S100C + SW-S100 OWNER’S MANUAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 11 • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. CAUTION 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. 2. 3. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. CAUTION CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 10 cm on the top, 10 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm at the back of DVR-S100, and 20 cm on the top, 10 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm at the back of SW-S100 — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to dripping or splashing, and never put any objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the top of the unit. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit in a place where foreign objects and liquid might fall. It might cause a fire, damage to this unit and/or personal injury. Do not place the following objects on this unit: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid drops inside this unit. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 220/240 V AC, 50 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the bottom of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES003. DANGER Visible laser radiation when open. Avoid direct exposure to beam. When this unit is plugged to the wall outlet, do not place your eyes close to the opening of the disc tray and other openings to look into inside. The laser component in this product is capable of emitting radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1. The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. CAUTION Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION FEATURES .......................................................................... 2 CHECKING THE ACCESSORIES ................................... 3 INSTALLING BATTERIES IN THE REMOTE CONTROL ........................................................................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................................... 4 Front panel ......................................................................... 4 Remote control (AMP mode) ............................................ 6 Front panel display (left) ................................................... 8 Front panel display (right) ................................................. 9 PREPARATION PREPARATION STEPS ................................................... 10 SPEAKER SETUP ............................................................. 11 Speaker placement ........................................................... 11 Installing the speakers ..................................................... 12 CONNECTIONS ................................................................ 14 Connecting TV and audio/video components ................. 14 Connecting the antennas .................................................. 16 Connecting the speakers .................................................. 17 Connecting to an external amplifier ................................ 19 Connecting the AC power cord ........................................ 19 Turning on the power ....................................................... 19 ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ................ 20 Using the test tone ........................................................... 20 USING BASIC FUNCTIONS BASIC PLAYBACK .......................................................... 21 Basic operations ............................................................... 21 Selecting a sound field program ...................................... 23 RECORDING .................................................................... 28 PLAYING A DISC TUNING TUNING ............................................................................. 54 Automatic and manual tuning ......................................... 54 Presetting stations ............................................................ 55 Tuning in to a preset station ............................................. 56 Exchanging preset stations .............................................. 56 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES OPERATING OTHER COMPONENTS USING THE REMOTE CONTROL ....................................................... 57 Setting the manufacturer code ......................................... 57 ADJUSTMENTS SET MENU ......................................................................... 59 List of SET MENU items ................................................ 59 Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .......................... 59 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .................... 60 2 LFE LEVEL ................................................................ 61 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ........................... 62 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ....................................... 62 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the front left and right speakers) ...................................................................... 62 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ................ 62 7 I/O ASSIGN (input assignment) ................................. 63 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ............................ 63 9 SP/PRE OUT (output source settings) ......................... 63 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ........................................................................ 64 CHANGING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR DSP PROGRAMS ...................................................................... 65 Adjusting the delay time .................................................. 65 Adjusting the parameter settings for PRO LOGIC II Music ............................................................................... 66 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................... 67 GLOSSARY ....................................................................... 72 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 75 English DISC INFORMATION ..................................................... 29 Types of disc that this unit can play ................................ 29 Region management information .................................... 29 Notes about handling discs .............................................. 29 MP3 playback .................................................................. 30 REMOTE CONTROL (DVD MODE) ............................. 31 PLAYING A DISC ............................................................. 32 Basic operation ................................................................ 32 ON-SCREEN MENU ......................................................... 34 Operating menu bar ......................................................... 34 Icons for disc menu ......................................................... 35 Icons for player menu ...................................................... 36 USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS .................................. 38 Using a disc’s menu ......................................................... 38 Enhancing video quality [U.S.A. and Canada models only] ................................... 38 DVD-Audio features ........................................................ 39 Enhancing audio quality (DISC DIRECT) ...................... 40 Switching audio tracks, subtitles and angles ................... 41 All group play .................................................................. 42 Programmed play ............................................................. 42 Random play .................................................................... 43 Bookmarks ....................................................................... 44 Repeat play ...................................................................... 45 Repeat A-B ...................................................................... 46 SETUP MENU ................................................................... 47 Operating the setup menu ................................................ 47 Summary of settings ........................................................ 48 Ratings ............................................................................. 51 PCM down conversion ..................................................... 51 Speaker settings ............................................................... 52 1 FEATURES The DVX-S100 is the Home Theater Sound System that delivers a powerful and realistic sound experience like that found in a movie theater just by combining the unit with the TV. The newest DSP programs will enhance the power and realism of various sources, from movies to concerts, and sporting events. Also, the Silent Cinema program allows you to enjoy the sound field even through the headphones. Since the DVX-S100 consists of a DVD Audio/Video receiver, a center speaker, front speakers, rear speakers and a subwoofer, you can enjoy stronger bass and surround effects as well as a good balance throughout the speakers. Moreover, the One-touch connection of the speaker connectors designed exclusively for this unit allows you to easily connect the speakers. ◆ Built-in 5-channel power amplifier ◆ DVD-AUDIO/VIDEO, CD, VCD, MP3, CD-R/ RW playback ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 decoder ◆ DTS/DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder ◆ Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP ◆ Easy connection of the center speaker, front speakers and rear speakers using special speaker connectors designed exclusively for this unit ◆ Multi-function remote control which can also be used for other audio/video components of certain manufacturers ■ About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using the buttons on either the main unit or the remote control. In this case, the operations performed by using the remote control are described in this manual. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority. • Some of the illustrations and names of the package contents etc written in this manual may differ from the actual products and the names written on the package etc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. (U.S.A. and Canada models) “DCDi” is a trademark of Faroudja, a division of Sage Inc. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 2 CHECKING THE ACCESSORIES DVR-S100 NX-SW100 (NX-S100S x4, NX-S100C, SW-S100) Remote control POWER TV Batteries (x2) (AA, R06, UM-3) AM loop antenna POWER AV Fasteners (4 sets) Pads Non-skid pads for the center (2 sets: 16 pieces) (2 sets: 16 pieces) speaker SLEEP TV MODE INPUT INTRODUCTION Check your package to make sure it contains the following items. TUNER CH VOL MUTE MD CD–R AUDIO SUBTITLE VCR REC VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 CD CODE SET SHIFT HALL JAZZ DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 6 /DTS PLAY MODE SELECT 9 7 8 REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO > –10 0 GROUP TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET CH Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada and (Europe, U.K. and Australia models) General models) CANCEL Speaker cables (for the rear speakers: 15m (x2), for the front/center speaker: 5m (x3)) PAGE MUTE ABCDE ENTER CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL System connector cable (5m x 1) Video pin cable INSTALLING BATTERIES IN THE REMOTE CONTROL Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two batteries (AA, R06, UM-3 type) with + and – oriented properly. 3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into place. ■ Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in the operating range of the remote control. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Preserving the manufacturer code Replace batteries early before they become unusable. The manufacturer code set by the user will be preserved for about two minutes when batteries run out or when they are removed. Note that the manufacturer code setting may be lost if more than two minutes elapses. Also, if you press any button on the remote control accidentally while replacing batteries, the manufacturer code will be lost. English 3 103_S100_01-09_EN 3 02.5.13, 1:26 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 STANDBY/ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING 8 9 PROGRESSIVE DISC DIRECT MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L 0 q w e r SILENT t y MEMORY u (U.K., Europe, Australia and General models) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Standby mode In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Disc tray The disc you play is loaded on this tray. 3 v Press to open and close the disc tray. 4 w Press to start playback. 5 a (A/B/C/D/E) (DVD mode) Press to stop playback. (Tuner mode) Selects preset station groups A to E. 6 d (PRESET/BAND) (DVD mode) Press to pause. (Tuner mode) Switches the reception band between FM and AM and also the mode between the tuning mode and the preset mode. 4 7 t/e, r/y (d PRESET/TUNING / PRESET/TUNING u) (DVD mode) Each time these buttons are pressed, the disc begins playing from the beginning of the track you select. When you keep pressing the buttons, the disc searches forward or backward. (Tuner mode) Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. 8 PROGRESSIVE (MEMORY) (U.S.A. and Canada models) (DVD mode) Switches between progressive video output and interlace video output. (Tuner mode) Stores the current station in the memory. MEMORY (U.K., Europe, Australia and General models) (Tuner mode) Stores the current station in the memory. 9 DISC DIRECT (AUTO/MAN’L) (DVD mode) Changes the modes of DISC DIRECT function. (Tuner mode) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 0 INPUT H/G Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. INTRODUCTION q INPUT MODE Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks. w DSP H/G Selects the DSP program. e STEREO Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers without effect sounds. r VOLUME +/– Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the recording (Rec) level. t Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. y Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. SILENT u Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the speakers. English 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control (AMP mode) This section explains the function of each button on the remote control when you operate this unit as an amplifier, not as a tuner or a DVD player. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before starting operation. Refer to “REMOTE CONTROL (DVD MODE)” on page 31 for the details about the functions of the remote control when you control this unit in the DVD mode. Also, refer to “OPERATING OTHER COMPONENTS USING THE REMOTE CONTROL” on pages 57 and 58 for the details about its functions when controlling other components connected to this unit. 3 CODE SET Used when setting up the manufacturer code. 4 DSP program buttons Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group. 5 LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted. y 6 Cursor buttons (j, i, u, d)/ENTER Select SET MENU items and change the settings on the SETUP menu etc. • The buttons on the remote control whose names are written in purple are operation buttons when you operate this unit in the AMP mode. 7 TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. 8 SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. 1 8 POWER TV POWER AV SLEEP 9 0 Input selector buttons/AMP Select the input source and set the remote control to operate the selected source component. Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling this unit. TV MODE INPUT CH TUNER VOL MUTE 2 MD CD–R AUDIO SUBTITLE VCR REC VIDEO 2 0 VIDEO 1 CODE SET 3 4 CD SHIFT HALL JAZZ 6 7 AMP ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL 9 5 DVD ROCK SPORTS /DTS TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH 9 POWER ( ) Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. q PAGE MUTE ABCDE ENTER AMP w e q STEREO Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the front left and right speakers. w MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. r e SET MENU Selects the SET MENU mode. t r VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL t B. BOOST Turns BASS BOOST function on or off. (U.S.A. model) 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 Basic operation buttons Used to operate the components selected with input selector buttons. 6 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ■ Using the remote control INTRODUCTION Approximately 6 m (20 feet) 30° 30° Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. English 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display (left) This front panel display mainly displays the information related to the playback of discs. 1 2 PGM RND A – B GROUP TITLE TRACK DVD V CD VIDEO AUDIO 3 CHAP 4 5 D.MIX P.PCM MLT.CH 888888888888 6 7 8 9 1 Play mode indicators PGM: Programmed play / RND: Random play / : Repeat play / A-B : Repeat A-B 6 Disc type indicators Indicates the type of disc. For example, DVD and AUDIO lights up when playing a DVD-Audio disc. 2 Mode type indicators GROUP: Group mode / TITLE: Title mode / TRACK: Track mode / CHAP: Chapter mode 7 w Lights up during playback. Blinks while resume function is working. 3 D.MIX (Down Mix) Lights up when the currently playing multi-channel audio track is mixed down into 2-channel. 8 d Lights up while playback is paused. 4 P.PCM (Packed PCM) Lights up while a P.PCM signal is input. 5 MLT.CH (Multi Channel) Lights up while a multi-channel signal is output. 8 9 Multi-information display (left) Shows various information such as title, chapter or track number, elapsed playing time etc. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display (right) MATRIX DIGITAL PRO LOGIC/ DSP PCM q w 2 34 VIRTUAL B. BOOST SP PRE 5 6 7 8 INTRODUCTION (U.K. and Europe models only) o 1 9 0 SILENT DVD/CD VIDEO 1VIDEO 2 VCR MD/CD–R TUNER STEREO AUTO TUNED PS PTY RT CT MOVIE THTR 12ENTERTAINMENT DTSDOLBY DIGITALPRO LOGIC PTY HOLD MEMORY L C R SLEEP dB ms MUTE LFE RL RC RR 88888888888888 e 1 Decoder indicators Lights up when the t, g, MATRIX are activated. r PRO LOGIC/ t or 2 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up in the virtual cinema DSP mode. 3 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 4 SP/PRE indicator The indicator of the item selected in “9 SP/PRE OUT” on the SET MENU lights up. (But it does not light up when headphones are connected.) 5 SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected while the digital sound field processor is on. 6 Input source indicator Shows the current input source with a cursor. 7 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 8 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 9 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station. 0 MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. yu i q DSP indicator Lights up when you select DSP programs. w v indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. e B. BOOST indicator Lights up when BASS BOOST is ON. (But it does not light up when headphones are connected.) r DSP program indicators The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. t Multi-information display (right) Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. y SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. u MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. i Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. o RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. English 9 PREPARATION STEPS In order to enjoy sound and video images with this sound system, follow the procedures as described below. See each page for details. Installing batteries in the remote control (P.3) Speaker setup (P.11) • Speaker placement (P.11) • Installing the speakers (P.12) Connections (P.14 – 19) • Connecting TV and audio/video components (P.14) • Connecting the antennas (P.16) • Connecting the speakers (P.17) • Connecting the AC power cord (P.19) • Turning on the power (P.19) Before connecting components • Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between the components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say, L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • Insert the plugs properly. The speakers may not output any sound or may output noise if they are not inserted properly. • The name of jack corresponds to input selector. • The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 220/240 V AC, 50 Hz. (General model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR Adjusting speaker output levels (P.20) 240V 220V VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model) After connecting components • Check them again to make sure they are correct. 10 SPEAKER SETUP Speaker placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. The rear speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Center speaker PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 5-speaker system, using front left and right speakers, rear left and right speakers and a center speaker. Front speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Notes • If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear and/or center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU (p.60) to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers to. • If you use speakers (with different tonal qualities) instead of the included speakers, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. 1.8 m (6 feet) Front speaker (L) Subwoofer Rear speaker (L) Front speakers Place the front left and right speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance between each speaker and each side of the video monitor should also be the same. Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and centrally between the front speakers. Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Note • Although the speaker system in this unit is magnetically shielded, it may still affect the color on the television monitor when using this unit near the television. Adjust the relative positions of this unit and the television if this happens. English 11 SPEAKER SETUP ■ Mounting the front and rear speakers Installing the speakers ■ Placing the center speaker Place the speaker on TV whose top is flat or on the floor under the TV or inside the TV rack so that it is stabilized. When placing the speaker on top of the TV, to prevent the speaker from falling down, put the provided fasteners at four points on the bottom of the speaker and the top of the TV. When mounting the front and rear speakers on a wall, use the holes on the speakers’ back panels. 1 Put the provided pads at the four corners on the rear of the front and rear speakers to prevent the front and rear speakers from moving by vibrations. 2 Fasten screws into a firm wall or wall support as shown below. Fastener Peel off the seal Cautions Diam. 3.5 to 4 mm • Do not place the speaker on top of the TV whose area is smaller than the bottom area of the speaker. If placed, the speaker may drop out causing an injury to you. • Do not place the speaker on top of the TV with an inclination. • Do not touch the adhesive surface after peeling off the seal as this will weaken its adhesive strength. • Thoroughly wipe clean the surface where the fastener is to be applied. Note that adhesive strength is weakened if the surface is dirty, oily or wet and that this may cause the center speaker to drop. ■ Placing the front and rear speakers When placing the front and rear speakers on a flat surface, attach the included non-skid pads to the corners on the bottom of the speakers as shown below. This prevents the speakers from sliding around. Non-skid pads 12 Min. 20 mm 6 mm Tapping screw (Available at the hardware store) SPEAKER SETUP 3 Hang the holes on the protruding screws. 60 mm ■ If you want to mount a speaker on a commercially available speaker stand (for the front/rear speakers) 60 mm • Make sure that the screws are securely caught by the narrow parts of the holes. • You can use the lower holes on the rear of the front/rear speakers. 60 mm PREPARATION The screw holes (at an interval of 60 mm) on the bottom and the rear of the speaker can be used to mount the speaker on a speaker stand. * Those screw holes can be used with M4 screws only. Front/rear speaker (bottom) 60 mm Cautions • Each speaker weighs 1.1 kg (2 lbs. 6 oz.). Do not mount them on thin plywood or a wall with soft surface material. If mounted, the screws may come out of the flimsy surface and the speakers may fall. This damages the speakers or causes personal injury. • Do not install the speakers to a wall with nails, adhesives, or any other unstable hardware. Long-term use and vibrations may cause them to fall. • To avoid accidents resulting from tripping over loose speaker cables, fix them to the wall. • Select a proper position on the wall to mount the speaker so that no one will injure his/her head or face. Front/rear speaker (rear) English 13 CONNECTIONS Connecting TV and audio/video components ■ Types of audio jacks L R ■ Types of video jacks PR PB 1 2 1 2 3 1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General models) Transmit color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) and luminance separately and provide the best quality picture. 2 VIDEO jack Conventional composite video signal. 3 S VIDEO jack Transmits color and luminance separately and achieves high-quality color reproduction. Notes 1 COAXIAL jack Connects a coaxial pin cable and provides the better quality sound than analog audio jacks. 2 OPTICAL jack Connects an optical fiber cable and provides the better quality sound than analog audio jacks. 3 Analog audio jacks Connect an audio pin cable. y • 1 and 2 are digital jacks. • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. • All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Notes • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video and S video jacks are only output through the corresponding composite video and S video jacks. • When you connect this unit to a video monitor, a video component and a recording component, connect the same types of jack, for example, the video jack on this unit to the video jack on the video component. • The description of the component video jacks may differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer also to the operation instructions for the component being connected. • Do not connect this unit to a video monitor through a video cassette recorder. If you do so, the picture may not be played back properly due to the copyright protection technology incorporated in this unit. • When progressive output (p.38) is selected in the DVD mode, video signals are only output from the component video jacks. • Digital output jack and analog OUT (Rec) jacks are independent. Only digital signals are output from digital output jack and analog signals from OUT (Rec) jacks. • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use an optical cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. Anti-dust cap Remove the cap covering the OPTICAL jacks when connecting an optical cable. Safely store the cap and always re-insert it in the terminal when the terminal is not in use. (This cap prevents the entrance of dust.) Anti-dust cap 14 104_S100_10-20_EN 3 Y 14 02.5.13, 1:27 PM CONNECTIONS ■ The connection example Use a cable specified for connecting each type of jacks. (The included video pin cable is used for connecting this unit to a video monitor.) For Audio component For Video Component S Video cable Coaxial cable Component video cable (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General models) Optical cable For A/V component PREPARATION Video pin cable (included) Audio pin cable Audio/Video cable The connection example shown below is just an example. Connect in accordance with the components you have. y • The solid lines indicate the output from this unit and the dotted lines indicate the input to this unit. INPUT S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR PB/CB S Video cable S Video cable OUTPUT INPUT S VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Video pin cable (included) AUDIO Component video cable (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General models) AUDIO L L R R VCR Audio/Video cable Y Video monitor S Video cable PR FM ANT PB Y IN IN VIDEO IN OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT OUT GND – AM ANT S VIDEO 75ΩUNBAL. MONITOR MONITOR VIDEO 1 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT MD/CD-R VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R [B] [A] COAXIAL IN OPTICAL IN OPTICAL OUT VCR MD/CD-R FRONT REAR CENTER VCR SYSTEM CONNECTOR MARK L Audio/Video cable R IN DIGITAL VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 IN IN OUT IN ANALOG OUT 6CH PREOUT SUBWOOFER TO SW-S100 (U.S.A. model) Coaxial cable Audio pin cable OUTPUT S Video cable S VIDEO Optical cable OPTICAL Optical cable INPUT COAXIAL OPTICAL AUDIO AUDIO Audio/Video cable VIDEO English OUTPUT AUDIO L L L R R R Audio pin cable TV/digital TV/cable TV CD recorder or MD recorder 15 104_S100_10-20_EN 15 02.5.13, 1:28 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. ■ Connecting indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT terminal. Indoor FM antenna (included) AM loop antenna (included) Bare wire Tab FM ANT GND – AM ANT 75ΩUNBAL. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 3 Release the tab. (The tab will return to its original position when you release your finger.) Once connected, pull the wires gently to check that they are connected securely. 4 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. y • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. 16 CONNECTIONS Connecting the speakers Connect the included speakers to the DVD AUDIO/VIDEO receiver (DVR-S100) using the included speaker cables and system connector cables as shown below. DVD Audio/Video receiver (DVR-S100) IN IN VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 OUT VIDEO IN OUT IN IN IN As this terminal is used for testing at the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. OUT OUT GND – AM ANT S VIDEO MONITOR MONITOR MD/CD-R MD/CD-R VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R [B] [A] COAXIAL IN OPTICAL IN VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 VCR FRONT REAR CENTER SYSTEM CONNECTOR MARK L OPTICAL OUT VCR PREPARATION FM ANT 75ΩUNBAL. R IN IN IN OUT IN OUT 6CH PREOUT SUBWOOFER ANALOG DIGITAL *1 Insert the plug with its TO SW-S100 *1 mark facing up. Front speaker (R) (NX-S100S) Front speaker (L) (NX-S100S) (RED) (WHITE) System connector cable *1 Speaker cable (RED) FRONT R Speaker cable (WHITE) FRONT L SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER FRONT R MARK L (RED) Speaker cable (GREEN) CENTER (WHITE) (GREEN) R (GRAY) SYSTEM CONNECTOR TO DVR-S100 REAR (SURROUND) Center speaker (NX-S100C) L (BLUE) DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX-S100C AND NX-S100S. (GREEN) Speaker cable (BLUE) REAR L Speaker cable (GRAY) REAR R (GRAY) (BLUE) Subwoofer (SW-S100) Rear speaker (R) (NX-S100S) Rear speaker (L) (NX-S100S) English 17 CONNECTIONS (RED) ■ Using commercially available speakers and speaker cables The back of the Subwoofer (RED) Connector Color tube (RED) (BLUE) Connector Color tube (BLUE) (BLUE) You can use commercially available speaker cables and speakers except for a subwoofer. If you use them, note the following. • Use the speaker whose impedance is 6Ω or higher. When using the speaker whose impedance is lower than 6Ω, the protection circuit may start working or this unit may be damaged. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • Use the speaker cable that is as thick as the included cable. Too thick cables cannot be used. Exchanging the speaker cables 2 Tab y • The connector of the included speaker cable and the terminal of the subwoofer are classified by color. Connect the same colors. • The label of the speaker is attached to each speaker cable. Connect the speakers in accordance with the labels. • Connect the color tube of the speaker cable to the plus (+) side of each speaker. If the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. • A cover is attached to the end of the speaker cable. Connect the speakers after removing the cover. • Make sure that the plugs of the system connector cable and the connectors of the speaker cables are inserted correctly before inserting them. 3 1 15 mm 4 Notes • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. • Do not insert the plug or connector forcibly. Doing so may damage the plug, connector or terminal. • Do not scratch, forcibly bend, or pull the system connector or speaker cable as this may damage the cable, causing loss of audio output, and may possibly result in a fire or electric shock. Take particular care in making sure that the cable is not squashed by a rack or caster. • Before disconnecting or connecting the system connector cable, disconnect the power supply cord of the subwoofer and DVD audio/video receiver. 18 1 Remove approximately 15 mm (9/16”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 2 3 Open the tab. 4 Return the tab to secure the wire. Pull the inserted bare wire of the speaker cable from the connector and insert the bare wire of the commercially available speaker cable. CONNECTIONS Connecting to an external amplifier Note • When you have connected this unit to an external amplifier, select PRE in “9 SP/PRE OUT” on the SET MENU. (See page 63.) 1 FRONT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 REAR jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SUBWOOFER jack Low bass signals distributed from the front, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. ■ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the unit is turned off for more than one week, the stored setting will be cleared. If so, set the setting again. • Volume level • Input source • Speaker output level (center, rear L/R and subwoofer) • Sleep timer • Parameter • Delay time • Set menu • Disc direct • Preset station Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON 1 2 FRONT REAR PREPARATION If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the 6CH PREOUT jacks as follows. Connecting the AC power cord STANDBY/ON CENTER 3 4 6CH PREOUT SUBWOOFER POWER TV y POWER AV SLEEP POWER ( ) TV MODE INPUT • The adjustments made in the following settings have an effect on the signals output from the 6CH PREOUT jacks. – BASS BOOST settings – Speaker settings – DSP programs CH TUNER VOL MUTE MD CD–R AUDIO SUBTITLE VCR REC VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 1 Press STANDBY/ON (POWER ( ) on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Note 19 English • When you use only some of the included 6 speakers or when using commercially available speakers, adjust speaker mode settings soon after turning the power on. See “1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings)” on page 60 for details. ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is complete, the output level heard at the listening position should be the same from each speaker. This is important for best performance of the digital sound field processor, and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS). LEFT SUBWOOFER RIGHT CENTER Note • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the SILENT jack when using the test tone. L SUR. Using the test tone 4 Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the speakers. Note • The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position using the remote control. CD SHIFT DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 /DTS 9 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET j, i CH • To adjust the level of the front speakers, use VOL +/– on the remote control. TEST ON SCREEN 5 CANCEL y PAGE CH VOL + / – B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) 1 2 3 20 When adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. MUTE PRESET TEST AMP ABCDE ENTER Adjust the level of the effect speakers using j/ i so that it matches the level of the front speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. Note VIDEO 1 CODE SET R SUR. Press AMP. Press TEST to output the test tone. Press VOL +/– to adjust the volume of this unit so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard (in order) from the LEFT (front left speaker), CENTER (center speaker), RIGHT (front right speaker), R SUR. (rear right speaker), L SUR. (rear left speaker), and the SUBWOOFER (subwoofer). The tone is produced for about 2 seconds from each speaker. • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume simply by pressing VOL +/– on the remote control. • If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, and rear right) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the front speakers, set “1E F. Level” on SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 61). This setting decreases the front speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E F. Level” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. Notes • If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON and the center speaker is not connected, the center channel sound is automatically output from the front left and right speakers. • If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the output level of the rear left and right speakers cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the rear right and left speakers. • If “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to FRONT, the test tone will be circulated skipping the subwoofer. BASIC PLAYBACK 5 Basic operations You can play the software loaded on the audio and video components connected to this unit. Note POWER AV SLEEP POWER ( ) TV MODE INPUT TUNER CH VOL MD MUTE CD–R AUDIO SUBTITLE VCR REC VIDEO 2 Input selector buttons VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT HALL DSP program buttons JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL 9 GROUP TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET CH ■ Enhancing the bass tones Press B. BOOST. • “Bass Boost ON” appears in the display. • This function enhances the bass tones of the subwoofer by increasing the level of the low-range frequencies. • To cancel B. BOOST mode, press B. BOOST again. PAGE MUTE ABCDE ENTER • If you have connected a recording component to the VCR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or low volume during playback of other components, try turning the recording component on. MUTE CH VOL + / – PRESET B.BOOST TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN USING BASIC FUNCTIONS POWER TV SLEEP Adjust the volume to the desired level. The volume level is displayed digitally. Example: –70 dB Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to 0 dB (maximum) VOL y (U.S.A. model) Indication on the front panel display (example): SP VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 AUTO Selected input source Input mode 1 2 Press POWER ( 3 Press INPUT H/G on the front panel repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. 4 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. • The B. BOOST mode does not function when the headphones are connected. Note • If a thudding noise is heard from the subwoofer when this function is turned on, lower the subwoofer level. Otherwise, the subwoofer may be damaged due to an excessive input level of low-bass signal. ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. ) to turn on the power. Turn on the A/V component connected to this unit. y • You can also cancel mute by pressing VOL +/–, etc. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. English 21 BASIC PLAYBACK ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (POWER ( on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. y ) ■ Setting the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on the SET MENU (see page 63 for details). Notes • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. • When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. (While playing a source) Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs y Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display soon after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using POWER ( ) on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. ■ Input modes and indications This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signals you desire. Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. • AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected automatically as follows: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal • DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected. • ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected. 22 • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed during playback of a DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC PLAYBACK Selecting a sound field program This unit’s built-in DSP (Digital Sound field Processor) can simulate various acoustic environments, including a concert hall and movie theater, with its 9 sound field programs. For the best results, choose a program appropriate for the selected audio source. VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 7 8 REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 9 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH d CANCEL PAGE MUTE STEREO MATRIX6.1 ABCDE ENTER 1 2 Press AMP. 3 After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL Press one of the DSP program buttons on the remote control to select the desired program. y • You can also select DSP program by pressing DSP H/G on the front panel. • Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. (U.S.A. model) Indication on the front panel display (example): Program name SP USING BASIC FUNCTIONS /DTS SELECT 6 PLAY MODE SELECT AMP DSP program buttons DVD/CD MOVIE THTR 1 70mm Spectacle Sub-program name ■ Feature of DSP programs Hi-Fi DSP (for music sources) No. Program Features 1 CONCERT HALL A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT/ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. ENTERTAINMENT/ 5ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties, etc. English 23 BASIC PLAYBACK No. STRAIGHT DECODE CINEMA-DSP (for cinema sources) CINEMA-DSP (for video sources) 4 Program Features ENTERTAINMENT/ Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. ENTERTAINMENT/ Concert Video This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. 5 TV SPORTS With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. 7 MOVIE THEATER 1/ Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER 1/ Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER 2/ Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER 2/ General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. 9 q/DTS/ENHANCED This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Pro Logic II decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. 9 q/DTS/NORMAL The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, no DSP effect is applied. 8 y • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode. Notes • There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal formats. • The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC II Movie, no sound will be heard from the front speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the front speakers.) 24 BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Table of Program Names for Each Input Format This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal format. Input No. Program 2 channel 5.1 channel 6.1 channel * ANALOG, PCM, DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY DIGITAL + Matrix 6.1 DTS + Matrix 6.1 DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle 6.1 Spectacle 6.1 MOVIE THEATER 1 70 mm Spectacle 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi 6.1 Sci-Fi 6.1 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure 6.1 Adventure 6.1 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General 6.1 General 6.1 9 DOLBY DIGITAL — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 — DTS DIGITAL SUR — — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC II USING BASIC FUNCTIONS 7 * means the Matrix 6.1 decoder is ON. y • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the MATRIX 6.1 button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected. • MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the virtual rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing a 6.1 channel source with MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control turned off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. English 25 BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Selecting PRO LOGIC II You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC II in program No. 9. (While playing a 2-channel source) 1 2 Press AMP. 3 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the decoder, PRO LOGIC II. 4 After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC II), select the mode appropriate for the source by pressing q/DTS. The selection switches as follows; PRO LOGIC II Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC II Music Press q/DTS. The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. y • You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II Movie, and PRO LOGIC II Music by pressing DSP H/G on the front panel repeatedly. Note • Playback using DOLBY PRO LOGIC II decoders is possible only for 2-channel signals. ■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software Press MATRIX 6.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder. The rear center channel is created from rear left and right channels, and output from virtual rear center speaker. The display changes AUTO ^ Matrix6.1 ^ OFF each time the MATRIX 6.1 button is pressed. • AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 and DTS + Matrix 6.1 depending on the signal. Virtual rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. • Matrix6.1: This setting produces 6-channel playback of the input source using the Matrix 6.1 decoder. The virtual rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1-channel source. • OFF: Virtual rear center speaker does not work in this setting. y • When the Matrix 6.1 decoder is functioning, the “MATRIX” indicator lights up on the front panel display. 26 Notes • Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the Matrix 6.1 decoding mode. To turn on the Matrix 6.1 decoder when playing such a source, select “Matrix6.1”. • Playing a 6.1-channel source is not possible even if MATRIX6.1 is pressed in the following cases: – when “1C REAR LR” in the SET MENU is set to NON; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when headphones are connected; – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played; – when 5ch Stereo is selected. • The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby mode. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP automatically. y • When virtual CINEMA DSP is functioning, the “VIRTUAL” indicator lights up on the front panel display. Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic II, or DTS Normal program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. BASIC PLAYBACK ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP • Format: The type of an input signal. When digital input is not known, the mode is set to the analog mode. Input signal Analog signal Analog PCM signal PCM Dolby Digital signal DTS signal • When SILENT CINEMA DSP is functioning, the “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. Unknwn Digital (Unknown Digital) fs: The sampling frequency of an input signal when a digital signal is input. If the frequency is not known, “unknown” appears on the front panel display. • Audio Channels: The number of audio channels included in an input signal when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input. • Rate (bit rate): The amount of data contained in an input signal per second when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input. If the bit rate is not known, “unknown” appears on the front panel display. • Flg (flag): An identification signal contained in an input signal when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input. If the flag is not detected, “None” appears on the front panel display. • Notes • This feature is not available when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphone. ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back on. Notes • If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the center or rear speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. • The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the front left and right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the setting of “1D BASS” on the SET MENU. • If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the front speakers. ■ Displaying the information about input signal During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the components connected to this unit. (While playing a stereo source) 1 2 Dolby Digital DTS Other digital signals y Display USING BASIC FUNCTIONS You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you could expert from actual speakers with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP SILENT jack by connecting your headphones to the while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) y ■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital signals The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: – DSP programs cannot be selected. – Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the front left and right speakers. (There may be sound output from the subwoofer depending on the SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.) Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be adjusted while listening to such a source. Press AMP. Press d to display the information about the input signal. English 27 105_S100_21-28_EN 27 02.5.13, 1:30 PM RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. 1 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected component. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. The procedure for selecting an input source is the same as the one described in “BASIC PLAYBACK” on page 21. 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between the components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS BOOST, VOLUME, “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not effect the recorded material. • A given input source is not output to the same OUT (Rec) channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not output to VCR OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • It is not possible to record the sound effect created by this unit’s DSP processing. • While recording video images played during the DVD mode, do not display ON-SCREEN menu. If displayed, the menu will be also recorded. • During digital recording, Karaoke vocal and Cinema dialog functions do not work. (See pages 35 and 36.) If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 28 ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. ■ Timer playback/recording This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating instructions for the component and the timer to be used. Notes • Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output when recording with a timer, turn the volume down. DISC INFORMATION Types of disc that this unit can play This unit is designed for use with following types of disc only. Never attempt to load any other type of disc into this unit because it may damage this unit. In this manual, the type of discs are indicated as below. DVD-Video DVD-Audio Video CD Audio CD DVD-V DVD-A VCD CD Notes • This unit is not compatible with Photo-CD, CD-ROM, DVDROM, DVD-RAM, SVCD, CDV, etc. (some DVD-R, DVDRW and DVD+RW can be played). • Be sure to use only discs made by reliable manufacturers. Some discs cannot be played depending on the disc characteristics or recording conditions. • Do not use any non standard shaped discs (heart, etc.). This unit is designed to meet DVD standard that supports region management system. Check the regional code number marked on the disc packages. If the number does not match this unit’s region number (see the table shown below or the back of this unit), this unit refuses to play that disc. Model Region number of this unit Discs can be played U.S.A. and Canada models “1” “1”, “ALL” or a mark which includes the region number “1”. U.K. and Europe models “2” “2”, “ALL” or a mark which includes the region number “2”. Australia model “4” “4”, “ALL” or a mark which includes the region number “4”. General model “3” “3”, “ALL” or a mark which includes the region number “3”. PLAYING A DISC DIGITAL VIDEO Region management information Notes about handling discs • Hold discs by touching only the edges or center hole. • Some DVD and VCD features described in this manual may not be available or may operate in a different way because they are subject to software producer’s design. Check each disc’s instruction. • This unit cannot play the video parts of a disc whose video signal type is PAL. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) • When a disc is not currently being loaded on the disc tray, store it in an appropriate case. • Do not use a disc printed on its surface by a commercially available label printer. • Do not expose discs to direct sunlight, high temperature or high humidity for a long period of time, because these might warp or otherwise damage the disc. NO! English 29 DISC INFORMATION • Playback of discs is generally not affected by small particles of dust or fingerprints on their playing surface. Even so, they should be kept clean. Wipe by using a clean, dry cloth. Do not wipe with a circular motion; wipe straight outward from the center. Starting play from a selected chapter Select a chapter using the numeric buttons (see “To select a specific track” on page 33) and press ENTER. Repeat play You can use chapter repeat or title repeat. (See page 45.) On-screen icons for disc information during play Total chapter number C 1/ 59 Current chapter • Do not try to clean the disc’s surface by using any type of disc cleaner, record spray, anti-static spray or liquid, or any other chemical-based liquid, because such substances might irreparably damage the disc’s surface. MP3 playback This unit can play MP3 format audio recorded for personal use with a computer etc. onto CD-R or CD-RW. Play may not be possible in some cases due to the condition of the recording. Discs recorded using MP3 differ from CDs in the following ways. Structure of the disc (example) Since the MP3 format can store several albums on a disc, a folder is assigned to a “Title”, and a file is assigned to a “Chapter”. Root directory : Title (Folder) : Chapter (File) 30 0 : 01 Elapsed play time (display only, you cannot use “time index” feature.) y • The following settings are recommended. – The bit rate 128kbps (The bit rates ranging from 32kbps to 320kbps are accepted.) – The sampling frequency 44.1kHz (The sampling frequency 32kHz is not accepted.) Note • Chapters may not be played in the order that you arranged them when recording. REMOTE CONTROL (DVD MODE) This section explains how each button on the remote control functions when you play a disc. Press DVD first when using this unit as a DVD player. • The buttons on the remote control whose names are written in green are operation buttons when you operate this unit in the DVD mode. • When pressing any of 79tyuiop while pressing SHIFT, these buttons function to operate this unit as a DVD player. TV SLEEP q u, d, j, i/ENTER Use to select and determine an item on menu screen, etc. TV MODE INPUT CH TUNER VOL MUTE 1 2 3 4 5 SHIFT 6 7 8 9 MD e w ON SCREEN Press to turn the on-screen icons on and off on the video monitor. r e AUDIO (P.41) DVD mode r e r (P.33) CD–R AUDIO SUBTITLE VCR REC VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL 9 0 q w TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH 9 PLAY MODE Press to switch among random play, program play, and normal play. 0 TOP MENU Press to display a disc menu screen. POWER AV 8 Numeric buttons/CANCEL Press to enter numbers./Press to cancel a specific mode or a setting. PAGE MUTE a ABCDE ENTER t y u i o p PLAYING A DISC POWER 7 SETUP Press to call up the setup menu screen. t ANGLE (P.41) y MARKER (P.44) u REPEAT (P.45) i A-B (P.46) o GROUP (P.39) CH p PAGE (P.40) PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) s a MENU Press to call up menu screen contained in the disc. s RETURN Press to go back to the previous screen when operating in the menu screen. 1 SUBTITLE Press to select a subtitle language. 2 d Press to pause. 3 t y (P.33) 4 w Press to start playback. 5 a Press to stop playback. English 6 v Press to open and close the disc tray. 31 PLAYING A DISC ■ To stop playback Basic operation Press a. STANDBY/ON v Resume function w This unit memorizes where a was pressed as long as this unit is turned on (W indicator flashes on the display). When you press w in this status, playback resumes from where it was stopped. To clear the memory, press a once more so that the W indicator goes off. (When a DVD-Video disc is played, a chapter review screen appears.) STANDBY/ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/BAND P Note • Opening the disc tray cancels the resume function. Chapter review function DVD-V This function plays the first few seconds of each chapter from the beginning of the title up to the memorized point so that you can review previous chapters. Press w while the message for chapter review is displayed on the screen. POWER TV POWER AV SLEEP POWER ( ) INPUT CH TUNER VOL MUTE MD CD–R AUDIO SUBTITLE VCR REC ■ After operation VIDEO 2 w a VIDEO 1 Remove the disc by pressing v and then press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or POWER( remote control. CD CODE SET SHIFT v DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 (U.S.A. model) 1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or POWER ( ) on the remote control to turn the power on. 2 3 4 Press v to open the disc tray. Load a disc. Press w. The disc tray closes and playback starts. y • When a menu screen appears DVD-A See “Using a disc’s menu” on page 38. DVD-V VCD : Notes • When this unit finishes playing a DVD, this unit stops playback or shows the menu screen. • This unit cannot play a CD-R or CD-RW disc unless the disc has been finalized. Please make sure to finalize the disc on the CD recorder before playing it on this unit. 32 Notes • This function may not work with some DVDs. • Canceling resume function will also clear the chapter review function. TV MODE ) on the PLAYING A DISC ■ Search POWER TV Press r (or e) on the remote control to search forward (or backward). or Press and hold r/y (or t/e) on the front panel to search forward (or backward). POWER AV SLEEP TV MODE INPUT CH TUNER VOL MD MUTE AUDIO SUBTITLE d t e CD–R VCR REC VIDEO 2 SHIFT 1 y y r • To increase the speed, press or keep pressing r, e on the remote control repeatedly or keep pressing r/y, t/e on the front panel. VIDEO 1 CD CODE SET HALL JAZZ DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL GROUP PAGE 9 TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET CH ≥10 ABCDE ENTER CH Note • If you search forward or backward while a Dolby Digital or DTS disc is played, the input mode is automatically switched to the analog mode and cannot be switched to other modes. PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) ■ Pause Press d. To resume play, press w. ■ Skip Press y (or t) on the remote control to skip forward (or backward). or Press r/y (or t/e) on the front panel to skip forward (or backward). Press t on the remote control or t/e on the front panel once for each chapter (track) to be skipped. ■ Frame advance/reverse DVD-A 1 2 Note • When playing a VCD with playback control (p.38), skip operation may not function as described above. ■ To select a specific track VCD Example (to select track 17): Press ≥10. Press 1. Press 7. VCD Press d during playback. Press the cursor buttons (j, i). • To return to normal play, press w. • Each time you press the cursor buttons (j, i), or when you keep pressing them, frames keep advancing or reversing. • Frames also advance when d is pressed. • With some DVD-Audio discs, frames advance or reverse only in the video parts. CD Enter a desired track number using numeric buttons. To select a two-digit number, press ≥10 and then enter the upper figure and the last figure successively. 1 2 3 DVD-V PLAYING A DISC j, i MUTE 7 Note • With Video CD, you cannot move backward. ■ Slow 1 2 DVD-A DVD-V VCD Press d during playback. Press r (or e) on the remote control. or Press and hold r/y (or t/e) on the front panel. • To return to normal play, press w. • To increase the speed, press or keep pressing r, e on the remote control repeatedly or keep pressing r/y, t/e on the front panel. Note • With Video CD, you cannot move backward. English 33 ON-SCREEN MENU Icons for player menu has 4 different menu bars as below. To switch the menu bar, press the cursor buttons (u, d). You can control various items using on-screen menu bar. POWER TV POWER AV SLEEP d Play menu TV MODE INPUT CH TUNER VOL MD MUTE d CD–R AB AUDIO SUBTITLE w a VIDEO 1 CODE SET IPB CD SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL GROUP PAGE 9 TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET CH ENTER TEST ON SCREEN OFF Numeric buttons BRIGHT f Audio menu SP OFF MUTE OFF ABCDE CH g Video menu PRESET ON SCREEN 1 2 3 ✱✱ e Display menu VIDEO 2 u, d , j, i /ENTER ––– OFF VCR REC B. BOOST RETURN VOL RETURN N (U.S.A. model) Operating menu bar 1 Press ON SCREEN. Each time ON SCREEN is pressed, the menu bar changes as below. 2 Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select the item you wish to adjust. The selected item is highlighted. 3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to change setting. • With some items, you need to press ENTER or i to determine the setting. • You can also use the numeric buttons when entering numbers to select a chapter, etc. a Icons for disc menu T 2 C 1 : 46 : 50 2 Digital 1 ENG 3/2.1 ch ON 1 ENG ■ To turn the screen off b Icons for player menu AB OFF ––– 1 Press RETURN repeatedly. 1 2 3 ✱✱ Note c Shuttle screen • Some items cannot be accessed when the play is stopped. +100 –100 Off ■ To change the menu bar position When the menu bar does not appear properly, you can adjust its position. 1 Select the rightmost icon ( ). Example) N 2 34 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to move the menu bar. ON-SCREEN MENU Icons for disc menu eg) DVD-Video T C 2 2 1 : 46 : 50 Digital 1 ENG 3/2.1 ch Title number DVD-V Track number DVD-A VCD T 2 ON 1 ENG 1 Vocal 1 ✱ OFF CD Chapter number DVD-V C 2 2 Time index (hour:minute:second) DVD-A DVD-V You can start play from the desired point by specifying the elapsed time. Eg) If you start play from 1:46:50 (1 hr 46 min 50 sec), press in the following order. [1]^[4]^[6]^[5]^[0]^[ENTER] 1 : 46 : 50 ON 1 ENG 2 1 Angle number DVD-A DVD-V When selecting an angle number, the scene encoded with that angle is played. 1 Playback control Indicates whether playback control is on or off. VCD Playback control cannot be adjusted. PBC ON Changing the time display DVD-A VCD CD Track elapsed time Track remaining time Page number DVD-A When you select a page number, the picture on that page is played. Page 1 Disc remaining time Audio mode VCD When you select a channel, sound is output from the channel you have selected. LR L R L R Digital 1 ENG 3/2.1 ch 12 3 DVD-A DVD-V 1 Audio track number 2 Audio track Language: See Å for language abbreviations. 3 Audio signal type: See ı for details. Notes • Display may differ in accordance with the disc’s specification. • Time remaining on the disc does not appears during program or random-sequence play. • When playing a video-CD disc using playback control, no track number or time is displayed. DVD-A DVD-V 1 Subtitle on/off 2 Subtitle language PLAYING A DISC Group number DVD-A G Karaoke vocal on/off DVD-A DVD-V (Karaoke DVD only) This works only when DISC DIRECT is functioning. Solo: OFF or ON Duet: OFF, V1+V2, V1 or V2 Å Language ENG: FRA: DEU: ITA: ESP: NLD: English French German Italian Spanish Dutch SVE: Swedish NOR: Norwegian DAN: Danish POR: Portuguese RUS: Russian JPN: Japanese CHI: Chinese KOR: Korean MAL: Malay VIE: Vietnamese THA: Thai *: Others ı Signal type/data LPCM/PPCM/qDolbyDigital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type k (kHz): Sampling frequency b (bit): Number of bits ch (channel): Number of channels Example: 3/2 .1ch 1: Subwoofer (not displayed if there is no subwoofer signal) 0: Rear channel not available on the disc 1: Rear channel (monaural) 2: Rear channels (left/right) English 1: Front channel (monaural) 2: Front channels (left/right) 3: Front channels (left/right) + Center 35 ON-SCREEN MENU Icons for player menu ■ Play mode menu ■ Display menu eg) DVD-Video eg) DVD-Video AB AB OFF ––– 1 2 3 ✱✱ OFF ––– IPB 1 2 3 ✱✱ A-B repeat (^ P.46) DVD-A DVD-V VCD CD [ENTER] (start point)^[ENTER] (finish point) To cancel [ENTER] Repeat play (^ P.45) DVD-V C: Chapter, T: Title, OFF: Normal play DVD-A VCD CD T: Track, A: All, G: Group, OFF: Normal play OFF IPB display DVD-V Displays the picture type (I/P/B)* of a still picture (when paused). ON OFF *I/P/B (P.73) IPB OFF Display dimmer Changes the brightness of the front panel display. BRIGHT BRIGHT Play mode display DVD-A VCD CD The play modes cannot be adjusted. RND: Random play, PGM: Programmed play, – – –: Normal play, ALL: All groups DVD-A Bookmarks (^ P.44) DVD-A DVD-V VCD CD You can mark at the points where you want to play again. (up to 5 points) To mark a point [j, i]^[ENTER] (at the desired point) To recall a bookmark [j, i]^[ENTER] To erase a bookmark [j, i]^[CANCEL] BRIGHT 36 AUTO* When you select AUTO, the front panel display gets darker when the disc on which video images are recorded is being played. But when you pause etc, it gets brighter temporarily. ■ Audio menu eg) DVD-Video SP OFF OFF This cannot be adjusted. SP OFF OFF Cinema dialog DVD-V (Dolby Digital/DTS 3ch or more channel discs) This works only when DISC DIRECT is functioning. When selecting ON, the volume level of the dialog part output from the center channel increases. 36 106_S100_29-37_EN DIM 02.5.13, 1:30 PM ON-SCREEN MENU ■ Video menu When PROGRESSIVE is on (U.S.A. and Canada models) N N U 0 N Auto Digital picture mode DVD-A DVD-V VCD N: Normal C: Cinema image (suited for movie viewing) Transfer MODE Selects the method of conversion for progressive output to suit the type of material being played. Auto (normal): for viewing film material Video: for video material Contrast (–7 to +7) Adjusts the contrast between light and dark part of the picture. Brightness (0 to +15) Adjusts the brightness of the picture. 0 PLAYING A DISC Digital picture mode DVD-A DVD-V VCD N: Normal C: Cinema image (suited for movie viewing) U: User mode To change the user mode 1 Select User mode. 2 Press (j, i) to select the item you wish to change. 3 Press (u, d) to change the setting. The following items are displayed when you select “U”. N Auto Sharpness (–6 to +6) (U.K., Europe, Australia and General models) Adjusts the horizontal resolution of the picture. 0 Color (–7 to +7) Adjusts the shade of the picture’s color. 0 ■ Shuttle screen Slow-motion play : Backward DVD-A DVD-V Pause DVD-A VCD DVD-V CD Slow-motion play : Forward DVD-A DVD-V VCD +100 –100 Search : Backward DVD-A DVD-V VCD CD Play DVD-A VCD DVD-V CD Search : Forward DVD-A VCD DVD-V CD Note • Slow-motion only works on the video parts of DVD-Audio. English 37 USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS ■ Video CD’s playback control Using a disc’s menu Discs may contain multiple audio tracks, subtitles, index and bonus materials such as movie trailers and cast information, etc. And many of them have menu screens that enable you to control these features. This section gives you general instruction about how to operate these screens. However, the operation methods may differ depending on the disc. POWER TV POWER AV SLEEP TV MODE INPUT CH TUNER VOL MUTE AUDIO SUBTITLE VCR REC t a VIDEO 2 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL 9 GROUP u, d, j, i / ENTER w y VIDEO 1 HALL TOP MENU MD CD–R TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET CH PAGE MUTE MENU ABCDE ENTER CH RETURN PRESET TEST ON SCREEN Numeric buttons B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) DVD-A 1 DVD-V Press TOP MENU or MENU during playback to show menu screen. With some discs, menu screen appears automatically when you start playback. VCD If a Video CD has “playback control” written on it or its jacket, it means that particular scenes or information can be selected for viewing interactively with the television using the menu screen. This unit can play Video CDs with playback control. Using menus to control play of a Video CD is called “menu play” in these operating instructions. Numeric buttons: Press to select the desired item. RETURN: Press to go back to the previous screen. w (PLAY): Press to play the selected item. y: Press to show the next screen. t: Press to show the previous screen. a (STOP): Press while a menu screen appears on the video monitor to cancel the playback control. Note • Playback control is automatically canceled during program play or random-sequence play. Enhancing video quality [U.S.A. and Canada models only] This unit’s component video outputs are capable of output progressive signals. You can enjoy even higher quality picture if you have connected this unit to a monitor that can receive progressive signals. PROGRESSIVE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING PROGRESSIVE DISC DIRECT MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L PROGRESSIVE 2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to select the desired item and then press ENTER. DISC DIRECT SILENT PROGRESSIVE indicator (U.S.A. model) Press PROGRESSIVE on the front panel. The PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up. To cancel this feature, press PROGRESSIVE again. 38 USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS Notes • If the screen shifts off center when using progressive output, see “Adjusting the screen position” described below. • When playing 4:3 aspect software with a 16:9 aspect widescreen monitor using progressive output, the picture may appear horizontally stretched to fill the screen. In that case, change the aspect to the correct one at your monitor. If the monitor cannot change the aspect, it is recommended to turn the progressive feature off. (The progressive output is switched to the interlace output.) • When the PROGRESSIVE function is working, video signals are output only from the component video jacks. (U.S.A. and Canada models) With some video monitors, the screen may shift off center with progressive signals output from this unit. To adjust the position, follow the method described below using the remote control. 1 2 This unit is compatible with YAMAHA digital cinema projector DPX-1. DVD-Audio features Press d to pause play. VIDEO 1 SHIFT Follow the step 1 on “Operating menu bar” on page 34 to show the video menu. CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 3 4 DVD-A Press i to select the rightmost icon ( ). /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 CANCEL 9 TOP MENU LEVEL Adjust the position. To move to the left, press the numeric button 1. To move to the right, press the numeric button 3. GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET u, d, j, i / ENTER CH PAGE MUTE PLAYING A DISC ■ Adjusting the screen position (when using progressive output) CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE “STANDARD DEFINITION” OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR VIDEO MONITOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525P DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER. PAGE GROUP ABCDE ENTER CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL Example: (U.S.A. model) Press 3 to move to the right. • Pressing the numeric button 2 after pressing 1 or 3 sets the screen back to the original position. • You can check whether the picture is in the center or not by switching to normal output (press PROGRESSIVE so the indicator turns off). 5 Save the adjusted position. First press a and then press SETUP to show setup menu. Then press SETUP once again (or RETURN) and now the position is saved. ■ To play a track on a specific group 1 Press GROUP while pressing SHIFT. The group and track icons appear on the video monitor. 2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a group number and press ENTER. 3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a track number and press ENTER. The selected track starts to play. y • You can also use the numeric buttons to select a group and a track. English 39 107_S100_38-53_EN 39 02.5.13, 1:31 PM USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS ■ To play a bonus group Some discs contain bonus groups. If it requires 4 digit password, consult the disc jacket, etc. 1 2 Press a to stop play. 3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a bonus group and then press ENTER or the cursor button (i). 4 5 Press GROUP while pressing SHIFT. The group and track icons appear on the video monitor. Enhancing audio quality (DISC DIRECT) DVD-A DVD-V VCD CD If you operate the DISC DIRECT function, a DVD-Audio disc is played with the multi-channels, and the DVDAudio disc recorded with the 192kHz sampling frequency is played, keeping the original sound quality. This function also has an effect on improving the sound quality of a disc recorded with lower sampling frequency. DISC DIRECT Enter a 4 digit password using the numeric buttons and then press ENTER. DISC DIRECT A/B/C/D/E Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a track and then press ENTER. PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L DISC DIRECT SILENT ■ To change pages DISC DIRECT indicator DVD-Audio may contain some information screens called “pages” that show photo galleries, artist biographies and lyrics, etc. When it appears, you can move to another page by pressing PAGE while SHIFT is pressed. (Page number appears on the display when you change pages.). Press DISC DIRECT. Each time DISC DIRECT is pressed, the display changes as follows: AUTO^ON^OFF^AUTO -... • AUTO: Some discs switch this function on or off. (In the case of DVD-Audio discs, AUTO is automatically switched to ON.) • ON: DISC DIRECT is turned on. • OFF (initial setting): DISC DIRECT is turned off. y • When DISC DIRECT is functioning, the DISC DIRECT indicator on the front panel lights up. • To adjust the output level of speakers while DISC DIRECT is functioning, see “Speaker settings” on the SETUP MENU on page 52. Notes • DISC DIRECT does not function while a SETUP MENU screen is displayed. • When DISC DIRECT is functioning, note the following: – Sound effect is not added to reproduced sound. (Turn DISC DIRECT off to add sound effect.) – Only 1E, 5, 9 settings of the SET MENU items function. (See page 59.) – The output level of effect speakers cannot be adjusted during playback. (See page 64.) – Adjusting the output level of speakers using test tone in the AMP mode cannot be made. (See page 20.) – The displays of decoders, PCM, input signal channels etc do not light up on the front panel display. – The speaker settings are switched to the settings for DVD use. (See page 52.) – When using headphones, set the “Speaker settings” on the SETUP MENU to “2-channel”. (See page 52.) – With some discs, sound may not be output from the subwoofer. 40 USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS Switching audio tracks, subtitles and angles DVD-A DVD-V VCD ■ Subtitles Press SUBTITLE during play. ON 1 ENG Some discs are encoded with several audio tracks, multilingual subtitles or multiple camera angles. Refer to disc jacket etc. to see which feature is supported. POWER TV • Pressing the button repeatedly toggles through all subtitles recorded on the disc. You can also use the cursor buttons (u, d) or the numeric buttons to change subtitles. POWER AV This icon appears on the video monitor. SLEEP TV MODE INPUT CH TUNER VOL CD–R AUDIO SUBTITLE SUBTITLE Notes MD MUTE VCR REC AUDIO VIDEO 1 SHIFT Numeric buttons CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 9 CANCEL GROUP TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET CH u, d, j, i Press SUBTITLE. 3 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select ON and OFF. PAGE CH B. BOOST RETURN VOL RETURN (U.S.A. model) ■ Audio tracks Different audio track languages and/or formats can be selected if available on the disc. Press AUDIO during play. LPCM 96k24b 1 2 MUTE PRESET 1 To turn on/off the subtitles: Press the cursor button (i). ( DVD-A , DVD-V ONLY) ABCDE ENTER TEST ON SCREEN ANGLE ■ Angles Some DVDs have scenes encoded with multiple camera angles so that different viewpoint can be selected during playback. ANGLE lights up on the front panel display while a scene encoded with multiple angles is being played. Press ANGLE while pressing SHIFT. This icon appears on the video monitor. • Pressing the button repeatedly toggles through all audio tracks recorded on the disc. You can also use the cursor buttons (u, d) or the numeric buttons to change tracks. Notes • Play restarts from the beginning of the current track if you change audio track while playing DVD-Audio, other than video section. • With DVD-Audio, track number 2 may appear even if the disc does not support multiple audio tracks. • You can also use the button to turn the vocals on and off on karaoke discs. See the instruction of each disc. PLAYING A DISC VIDEO 2 • “- -” appears if the disc does not have a subtitle. • Subtitles may not change immediately after you press the button. 1 This icon appears on the video monitor. • Pressing ANGLE repeatedly while pressing SHIFT toggles through all angles recorded on the disc. You can also use the cursor buttons (u, d) or the numeric buttons to change angles. ■ To turn the icon off Press RETURN. Notes • With some discs, you cannot change audio tracks, subtitles or angles in the way described above. In that case, go to the disc menu and change them. • With some discs, you cannot change angles. English 41 USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS All group play 1 2 2 DVD-A Press a to stop play. Press PLAY MODE while pressing SHIFT. The “All group play” screen appears. 3 Press PLAY MODE repeatedly while pressing SHIFT to select the program screen. Each time you press PLAY MODE while pressing SHIFT, the screen changes as follows: Indication on the video monitor (example) Program screen ( Programmed play mode) Playing in your desired order Press w. PLAY MODE Choose a track, then press ENTER. No 1 Track Time Play Programmed play DVD-A VCD Clear Clear all CD SELECT You can enjoy listening to your favorite tracks selected from a disc in any desired order by programming tracks. POWER TV Total time ENTER 0:00 Press PLAY to start Random screen (Random play mode) Playing in random sequence POWER AV RETURN SLEEP TV MODE INPUT TUNER CH VOL MUTE AUDIO SUBTITLE VCR REC y w a SHIFT VIDEO 2 CD SHIFT DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 9 > –10 0 GROUP TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET u, d, j, i / ENTER CH CANCEL PAGE MUTE ENTER TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) 42 Numeric buttons CANCEL 3 4 Press numeric buttons to select the track. Press w to start play. y • You can also use the numeric buttons to select a track. ABCDE CH PRESET 1 • The “PGM” indicator lights up on the front panel display. VIDEO 1 CODE SET HALL PLAY MODE Returning to normal play MD CD–R Press a to stop play. (In the case of DVD-Audio) • The “All group play” screen is added to step 2. • In step 4, press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select a group and then press ENTER. Then, press the cursor buttons (u, d) again to select a track and then press ENTER. • You can also use the numeric buttons to select a group and a track. USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS ■ To change or add to the program during programmed play 1 Press a repeatedly to stop programmed play. 2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the order of the tracks you want to play. 3 Random play When you select this mode, this unit plays all tracks on a disc in random sequence. POWER TV POWER AV SLEEP TV MODE Press the numeric buttons to enter a track number. INPUT VOL MUTE ■ To cancel the programmed tracks AUDIO VCR REC w VIDEO 2 a Press a repeatedly to stop programmed play. VIDEO 1 CD CODE SET SHIFT Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the track you want to cancel. PLAY MODE SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 CANCEL 9 GROUP 3 MD CD–R TOP MENU LEVEL Press CANCEL. ENTER CH Note MENU SET MENU PRESET PAGE PLAYING A DISC 2 TUNER CH SUBTITLE 1 CD VCD DVD-A CANCEL MUTE ABCDE ENTER CH j, i PRESET • When you program a track of a Video CD (ver.2.0), playback control is canceled during programmed play. ■ To move up and down the pages on the program screen Press e to move up the page, or press r to move down the page. TEST ON SCREEN Press a repeatedly to stop programmed play. 2 Press PLAY MODE twice while pressing SHIFT. • When turning the power off, opening the disc tray, or switching the input source, all the programs are canceled. VOL (U.S.A. model) 1 2 Press a to stop play. 3 Press w to start random play. ■ To exit programming mode 1 B. BOOST RETURN Press PLAY MODE repeatedly while pressing SHIFT. The “RND” indicator lights up on the front panel display. English 43 USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS ■ To cancel random mode 1 2 Press a repeatedly to stop playback during random play. Press PLAY MODE while pressing SHIFT. The “RND” indicator goes off. • Opening the disc tray also cancels this mode. Bookmarks DVD-A DVD-V VCD CD This feature allows you to mark up to 5 points so that you can quickly return to those points later. VIDEO 1 SHIFT CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT HALL Note JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 /DTS 9 • When this unit is in random mode while a Video CD (ver.2.0) is loaded, playback control is canceled during random play. TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET j, i / ENTER ■ Random play (DVD-Audio) CH CANCEL PAGE MARKER CANCEL MUTE ABCDE ENTER CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL In the step 2 of “Random play”, press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select a group and then press ENTER. Eg) DVD-Audio (The disc that has 2 groups.) (U.S.A. model) Random Playback 1 Choose a group or groups. All 1 Press MARKER while pressing SHIFT. 2 This icon appears on the video monitor. SELECT ENTER Highlighted RETURN Press PLAY to start 2 Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select one of five asterisks. The selected asterisk is highlighted. 3 Press ENTER. The selected asterisk turns to be the bookmark number. y • You can select more than one group. • You can use the numeric buttons to select a group. If you want to cancel the group(s) you have selected while selecting them, press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select the group you want to cancel, and then press CANCEL or ENTER. This icon appears on the video monitor. Bookmark number y • You can also cancel a group by entering the number you want to cancel using numeric buttons. ■ To play from the marked point Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select a bookmark number and press ENTER. ■ To clear a bookmark Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select a bookmark number and press CANCEL. Note • When you open the disc tray, turn this unit off or switch the input source, all bookmarks are cleared. 44 USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS Repeat play DVD-A DVD-V VCD CD This function allows you to play your desired chapter, track or disc repeatedly. VIDEO 1 SHIFT CD CODE SET SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 CANCEL 9 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH REPEAT DVD-A VCD CD Press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT during programmed play. (p.42) Each time you press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT, the repeat mode changes as follows: Eg) CD PAGE MUTE A PGM ABCDE ENTER CH PRESET B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) Press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT during playback to select repeat mode. Each time this button is pressed, repeat mode changes as follows. The name of the selected repeat mode scrolls once on the multi-information display and the corresponding indicators light up. Eg) DVD-Video DVD-Audio/Video-CD/CD T: TRACK: The current track is played repeatedly. A: ALL: The current programmed track is played repeatedly. OFF: NORMAL PLAY: Repeat mode is canceled. (returning to normal program play) ■ Random-sequence repeat DVD-A VCD CD PLAYING A DISC TEST ON SCREEN ■ Program repeat Press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT during random play. (p.43) Each time you press REPEAT while pressing SHIFT, the repeat mode changes as follows: Eg) CD C A DVD-Video C: CHAPTER: The current chapter is played repeatedly. T: TITLE: The current title is played repeatedly. OFF: NORMAL PLAY: Repeat mode is canceled. DVD-Audio/Video-CD/CD T: TRACK: The current track is played repeatedly. A: ALL (Video CD, CD): The current disc is played repeatedly. or G: GROUP (DVD Audio): The current group is played repeatedly. OFF: NORMAL PLAY: Repeat mode is canceled. RND DVD-Audio/Video-CD/CD T: TRACK: The current track is played repeatedly. A: ALL: The current disc is played repeatedly. OFF: NORMAL PLAY: Repeat mode is canceled. (returning to normal random play) y • When the repeat mode is OFF, “ ” indicator goes off. Notes • Repeat play may not work properly with some DVD-Video. • Repeat play does not work with an interactive DVD-Video or during menu play of a VCD with playback control. English 45 USING MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS Repeat A-B DVD-A DVD-V VCD CD ■ To cancel A-B repeat Press A-B while pressing SHIFT. This function allows you to specify two points and play between them repeatedly. This icon appears on the video monitor. VIDEO 1 CODE SET SHIFT CD SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 CANCEL 9 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH Notes A-B PAGE MUTE ABCDE ENTER CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) 1 Press A-B while pressing SHIFT during play at the point where you want to start A-B repeat. A This icon appears on the video monitor. y •“ 2 ” and “A-” light up on the front panel display. Press A-B while pressing SHIFT at the point where you want to end A-B repeat. AB This icon appears on the video monitor. y • “B” is added on the front panel display. The section between the point A and B starts playing repeatedly. 46 • This function may not available with some DVD-Video. • This function works only within a title (DVD-Video) or a track (DVD-Audio, VCD, CD). SETUP MENU With the setup menu, you can change this unit’s system defaults to suit your preference and this system. Operating the setup menu VIDEO 1 SHIFT SETUP CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 9 GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET u, d, j, i / ENTER CH PAGE Press RETURN. CH B. BOOST RETURN Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to change the setting and press ENTER. When pressing ENTER, you can go back to the screen in step 2. CANCEL MUTE PRESET TEST ON SCREEN 4 ■ To go back to the previous screen ABCDE ENTER Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the desired item and press ENTER. VOL PLAYING A DISC TOP MENU LEVEL 3 RETURN ■ To get out from the setup menu mode Press SETUP while pressing SHIFT. Note (U.S.A. model) 1 Press SETUP while pressing SHIFT. The menu screen appears on the video monitor. 2 Press the cursor buttons (j, i) to select a menu group. There are five menu groups. The screen shows the items that belong to the menu group of the selected tab. Disc Audio Video menu ■ To return all the settings on the setup menu to the factory settings (While playback is stopped) Keep pressing d and a on the front panel together until “Initialized” appears on the video monitor. Disc menu 1 SETUP • When you display the setup menu screen, the DISC DIRECT function is automatically turned on. When finishing the setup menu, the setting of the function is automatically returned to the previous setting. English M 2 SETUP Video TV Aspect 4:3 Pan&Scan TV Type Audio menu A t ti 3 SETUP Audio Speaker Setting Multi-channel Display menu 4 SETUP Others menu Display M L E li h 5 SETUP Others English 47 SETUP MENU Summary of settings The following chart shows the menu groups and each items. In the “Options” column, the factory settings are underlined. Menu groups Disc Items Audio DVD-A DVD-V Select the preferred audio track language. Subtitle DVD-A DVD-V Select the preferred subtitle language. Menus DVD-A DVD-V Select the preferred disc menu language. Ratings DVD-V Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. See p.51 for details. Options (U.S.A. and Canada models) English French Spanish Other** (Australia model) English French German Spanish Original* Other** (U.K. and Europe models) English French German Spanish Original* Other** (General model) English Chinese Original* (U.S.A. and Canada models) Automatic English Spanish Other** (Australia model) Automatic English German Italian Other** (U.K. and Europe models) Automatic English German Italian Other** (General model) Automatic English Other** Original* Italian Italian Other** French French Spanish French Spanish Chinese (U.S.A. and Canada models) English French Spanish (Australia model) English French German Spanish Other** (U.K. and Europe models) English French German Spanish Other** (General model) English Chinese Other** Other** Italian Italian Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected) 8 No Limit 1 to 7 0 Lock All Changing ratings (When level 0 – 7 is selected) Unlock Player Change Level Change Password Temporary Unlock Video 48 TV Aspect If you connect to a 4:3 conventional-type monitor, select “4:3 Pan&Scan” (left and right sides trimmed when playing 16:9 software) or “4:3 Letterbox” (black areas appear at the top and bottom when playing 16:9 software). Select “16:9” if you connect to a widescreen monitor. 4:3 Pan&Scan 16:9 Still Mode Specify the type of picture shown when paused. First select “Automatic”. If a still picture jitters, select “Field”. If details don’t appear clearly enough, select “Frame”. Automatic 4:3 Letterbox Field Frame SETUP MENU Menu groups Video Audio Items Options Black Level Control (U.S.A. and Canada models) Change the black level of the picture. Select “Lighter” when you connect to the monitor using VIDEO or S VIDEO terminal. Select “Darker” when using COMPONENT terminals. Lighter NTSC Disc Output (U.K., Europe, Australia and General models) Select video signal format (PAL 60 or NTSC) to be output when playing NTSC disc. (U.K., Europe and Australia models) PAL 60 NTSC (General model) PAL 60 NTSC Speaker Setting DVD-A DVD-V Adjust the settings to suit your audio system and your listening environment when DISC DIRECT is functioning. See p.52 for details. Multi-channel: Select this when connected to multi-channel system. There are three sub-items as below. • Speaker presence and size • Delay time • Channel balance Darker Display PCM Down Conversion DVD-A DVD-V Select how to output the high sampling-frequency audio signals on a disc that is not copyright-protected. See p.51 for details. No Yes Dolby Digital DVD-A DVD-V Decide the signal type that output from this unit’s digital outputs. Select “Bitstream” when connected device has Dolby Digital decoder. Select “PCM” when not. Bitstream PCM DTS Digital Surround DVD-A DVD-V Decide the signal type that output from this unit’s digital outputs. Select “Bitstream” when connected device has DTS decoder. Select “PCM” when not. Bitstream PCM MPEG DVD-A DVD-V (U.K., Europe and Australia models) Decide the signal type that output from this unit’s digital outputs. Select “Bitstream” when connected device has MPEG decoder. Select “PCM” when not. Bitstream PCM D. Range Compression DVD-A DVD-V (Dolby Digital only) Change the dynamic range for late night viewing. Select “On” to make it easier to hear dialog etc. even at low volume level. Off On Audio during Search DVD-A DVD-V VCD Select whether to have sound during search. Select “Off” if sound distorted when searching with Dolby Digital or DTS material. With DVD-Audio, the sound may be heard even if you select “Off”. On Off Menu Language Select the preferred language for on-screen messages and setup menu. (U.S.A. and Canada models) English Français Español (Australia model) English Français Deutsch Español (U.K. and Europe models) English Français Deutsch Español (General model) English On-Screen Messages Select whether to show on-screen messages or not. On PLAYING A DISC 2-channel: Select this when connected to 2-channel system. Italiano Italiano Off English 49 107_S100_38-53_EN 49 02.5.13, 1:32 PM SETUP MENU Menu groups Others Items Options DVD-Video Mode Some DVD-Audio discs contain the DVD-Video contents that can be played only by a DVD-Video player. If you want to play the contents, select “On”. If not, select “Off”. Off On Demo A demonstration of the unit’s on-screen displays starts when you select “On”. The demonstration stops when you press button a etc. and the setting reverts to “Off”. Off On Notes • * If you set to “Original” at Audio, the original language of each disc is selected. **If you set to “Other” at Audio, Subtitle or Menus, you need to select a four-digit number of the desired language from the language code list and enter with numeric buttons. • When the audio you have selected from “Audio” is not recorded on the disc but instead the subtitle of the same language is recorded on it, the subtitle is displayed on the screen. However, if the audio is recorded on the disc, the subtitle is not displayed. ■ Language selection and language code list Language code list 6565: 6566: 6570: 6577: 6582: 6583: 6588: 6590: 6665: 6669: 6671: 6672: 6678: 6679: 6682: 6765: 6779: 6783: 6789: 6865: 6869: 6890: 6976: 6978: 6979: 6983: 6984: 6985: 7065: 7073: 7074: Afar Abkhazian Afrikaans Ameharic Arabic Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Byelorussian Bulgarian Bihari Bengali; Bangla Tibetan Breton Catalan Corsican Czech Welsh Danish German Bhutani Greek English Esperanto Spanish Estonian Basque Persian Finnish Fiji 7079: 7082: 7089: 7165: 7168: 7176: 7178: 7185: 7265: 7273: 7282: 7285: 7289: 7365: 7378: 7383: 7384: 7387: 7465: 7473: 7487: 7565: 7575: 7576: 7577: 7578: 7579: 7583: 7585: 7589: 7665: Faroese French Frisian Irish Scots Gaelic Galician Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hindi Croatian Hungarian Armenian Interlingua Indonesian Icelandic Italian Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada Korean Kashmiri Kurdish Kirghiz Latin 7678: 7679: 7684: 7686: 7771: 7773: 7775: 7776: 7778: 7779: 7782: 7783: 7784: 7789: 7865: 7869: 7876: 7879: 7982: 8065: 8076: 8083: 8084: 8185: 8277: 8279: 8285: 8365: 8368: 8372: 8373: Lingala Laotian Lithuanian Latvian, Lettish Malagasy Maori Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Malay Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali Dutch Norwegian Oriya Punjabi Polish Pashto, Pushto Portuguese Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Romanian Russian Sanskrit Sindhi Serbo-Croatian Singhalese 8375: 8376: 8377: 8378: 8379: 8381: 8382: 8385: 8386: 8387: 8465: 8469: 8471: 8472: 8473: 8475: 8476: 8479: 8482: 8484: 8487: 8575: 8582: 8590: 8673: 8679: 8779: 8872: 8979: 9072: 9085: Slovak Slovenian Samoan Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Sundanese Swedish Swahili Tamil Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Tonga Turkish Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapük Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Chinese Zulu Note • Selecting audio, subtitle or disc menu language is a disc-dependent matter. The language selected at the setup menu is not effective if a disc does not have it. 50 107_S100_38-53_EN 50 02.5.13, 1:33 PM SETUP MENU Ratings ■ To change settings (Level 7 to 0) DVD-V Depending on software capability, you can prevent discs or scenes with objectionable material from being played according to your desired rating. You can select the level and lock it by designating a password. Level 8 When you select “Ratings” in the setup menu, the screen where you enter a password is displayed. Enter 4-digit number with numeric buttons and press ENTER. Unlock Player: unlocks the rating and returns to level 8. Change Password: changes the password. Change Level: changes the level of the rating. Temporary Unlock: temporarily unlocks the level of the rating. It will be kept unlocked until you switch the input source, turn the power off, or open the disc tray. 2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the desired item and press ENTER. All DVDs can be played. Level 7 to 1 Level 0 Level of restriction becomes severer as the number gets smaller. All DVDs cannot be played. VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO /DTS 9 >–10 0 GROUP TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET u, d, j, i / ENTER CH CANCEL PAGE Numeric buttons CANCEL MUTE ABCDE ENTER CH Return the setting to the factory setting. See page 47. PRESET TEST ON SCREEN ■ If you have forgotten your password B. BOOST RETURN VOL PLAYING A DISC 1 Note • Not only the password setting but also all the other settings will turn back to the factory settings. (U.S.A. model) ■ Setting method (Level 8) 1 Press SETUP while pressing SHIFT. The menu screen appears on the video monitor. 2 Press d to select “Ratings” and press ENTER. 3 Enter 4-digit number with numeric buttons and press ENTER. Press CANCEL if you want to re-enter other number. The screen that confirms your password appears. Do not forget your password. SETUP SELECT Ratings Enter a 4-digit password, then press ENTER. Password PCM down conversion DVD-A DVD-V Decide whether to output high-quality digital signals (sampling frequency of 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) or not, in accordance with the capability of the connected component. • If your A/V component is capable of handling high-rate sampling frequency digital signals, select “No”. • If not, select “Yes” so that digital output signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. Note • If a disc is copyright protected or has a sampling frequency of 176.4 kHz or more, signals are automatically converted to either 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. ✱✱✱✱ ENTER RETURN 4 Press ENTER. When you select a disc that exceeds the rating you have set, a message appears on the video monitor. In that case, follow the procedure that appears on the screen. You can go back to the previous screen by pressing ENTER. English 51 SETUP MENU Speaker settings DVD-A DVD-V When you adjust speakers while DISC DIRECT is functioning, follow the procedures described below. a Output mode Change the settings of each speaker in accordance with your speaker system. 1 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to select a speaker and press ENTER. 2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to select the setting and press ENTER. • Choices of the speaker size L: Large, Small R: Large, Small C: Large, Small, None SW: Used, Not used LS: Large, Small, None RS: Large, Small, None The size of L is set to be the same as that of R. Therefore, if you select Large for L, the size of R is automatically set to Large. This also applies to the sizes of LS and RS. • Example: Rear left speaker VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT HALL JAZZ DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 /DTS 9 PRESET u, d, j, i / ENTER CH CANCEL GROUP MENU SET MENU TOP MENU LEVEL PAGE MUTE ABCDE ENTER CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) If you wish to enjoy multi-channel sound reproduction, you need to select “Multi-channel” on the setup menu and make following adjustments. When you select “2-channel”, that is, when connecting to only 2 speakers or a Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the following adjustments are not necessary. Front (L) a Center bac Front (R) a Exit SETUP L ms 0 C Exit Test dB 0 R dB 0 SW dB 0 RS SELECT LS ENTER RETURN dB 0 ms 0 Test signal Rear Subwoofer (L) a (L) c b (R) c (R) a b a 52 1 2 3 LS LS 1 when the speaker is not used. 2 when using a large speaker capable of lowfrequency (under 100 Hz) output. 3 when using a small speaker that is not capable of low-frequency output. (the included speakers, NX-S100S etc.) • Factory settings of the speaker sizes L/R: Large C/LS/RS: Large SW: Used SETUP MENU b Delay time (Only center/rear channels of the DVD-Video discs recorded in the Dolby Digital format) c Speaker balance You can adjust the output level of each effect speakers (center, rear L/R) using the test tone. 1 To obtain the maximum effect of Dolby Digital 5.1 channel source, all speakers should be located at the same distance from the listening position. However, in many cases the center speaker is placed in line with the front speakers, etc. You can virtually increase the distance of the center and rear speakers by adjusting the delay time. L 2 R C C R RS LS Listening to the test tone, press the cursor buttons (u, d) to adjust the volume of effect speakers and press ENTER. The value in the “dB” box changes. Distance A Distance C Listening position LS SW Distance B RS Note • The subwoofer cannot output the test tone. Play something and return to this screen to adjust the output level of the subwoofer. ■ To exit the speaker setting mode PLAYING A DISC L Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to select “Test” and press ENTER. The test tone is one speaker at a time in below order, starting with the left front speaker. Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to select “EXIT” and press ENTER. 1 2 Press the cursor buttons (u, d, j, i) to select a “ms” box and press ENTER. Press the cursor buttons (u, d) to adjust the delay time and press ENTER. • Settings Distance A, Distance B > = Distance C: 0 ms Distance A, Distance B < Distance C: The following adjustments should be made. Notes • When DISC DIRECT is functioning, adjust the settings of the speakers on the SETUP MENU screen. However, when it is not functioning, follow the procedure in “ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 20 to adjust the settings. • These adjustments may not be effective when the disc’s original sound design is protected. P.PCM indicator lights up or D.MIX indicator turns off in that case. Center speaker Difference Setting Approx. 50 cm (1 1/2 feet) 1.3 ms Approx. 100 cm (3 feet) 2.6 ms Approx. 150 cm (5 feet) 3.9 ms Approx. 200 cm (6 feet) 5.3 ms Rear speakers Difference Setting Approx. 200 cm (6 feet) 5.3 ms Approx. 400 cm (12 feet) 10.6 ms Approx. 600 cm (18 feet) 15.9 ms English 53 TUNING ■ Manual tuning Indication on the front panel (example) Preset station number Reception band If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. TUNER SP C1:AM Preset station group 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” at left. 2 Press AUTO/MAN’L so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. 3 Press PRESET/TUNING u / d to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. 630 kHz Colon*1 Station frequency *1 The colon (:) lights up in the preset mode and goes off in the tuning mode. Automatic and manual tuning There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. PRESET/BAND AUTO/MAN'L DISC DIRECT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L SILENT PRESET/TUNING u/d INPUT H / G ■ Automatic tuning 1 Press INPUT H / G (TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. 2 Press PRESET/BAND to select the reception band. (“FM” or “AM”) Each time PRESET/BAND is pressed, the mode changes as follows: FM (Tuning mode) ^ AM (Tuning mode) ^ (Preset mode) ^ FM (Tuning mode) ^ ... y • Make sure that the colon (:) turns off when the mode switches to the tuning mode. 3 Press AUTO/MAN’L so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. 4 Press PRESET/TUNING u / d once to begin automatic tuning. Press u to tune in to a higher frequency, or press d to tune in to a lower frequency. y • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. • When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. 54 y • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. TUNING Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset group and number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower or higher frequencies. Presetting stations PRESET/BAND MEMORY 1 DISC DIRECT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/BAND PRESET/TUNING MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L SILENT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING u/d AUTO/MAN'L (After keeping MEMORY pressed for more than 3 seconds) Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u / d to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 3 Press PRESET/BAND to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING u / d. When pressing d, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the lower frequencies, and when pressing u, it begins toward the higher ones. 1 2 Press PRESET/BAND to select the FM band. 3 Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset number and the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Press AUTO/MAN’L so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. 1 Tune in to a station. See page 54 for tuning instructions. When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of received station. 2 Press MEMORY. The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. 4 Press PRESET/TUNING u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press u to select a higher preset station number. Press d to select a lower preset station number. y • When a station data is stored under a preset number, the frequency and reception band are also stored. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Exchanging preset stations” on page 56. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. Notes TUNING 2 ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number. Follow steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations)” on the left. • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. English 55 TUNING 5 6 Press MEMORY on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear on the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. PRESET/BAND Notes DISC DIRECT • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E CD SHIFT DVD AMP ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 /DTS 9 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH ENTER CH Press and hold PRESET/BAND for more than 3 seconds. “E1” appears and the “MEMORY” indicator flashes on the front panel display. 3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u / d. “A5” appears and the “MEMORY” indicator flashes on the front panel display. 4 Press PRESET/BAND again. “EDIT E1-A5” appears on the front panel display, and then the preset stations are exchanged. ABCDE PRESET u, d PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) 1 Press ABCDE (A/B/C/D/E on the front panel) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press ABCDE. 2 Press PRESET u / d (PRESET/TUNING u/ d on the front panel) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band and frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. PRESET/TUNING u/d 2 PAGE ABCDE 56 108_S100_54-56_EN 56 AUTO/MAN’L Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u / d. See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left. CANCEL MUTE MEMORY 1 VIDEO 1 CODE SET PRESET/TUNING SILENT Tuning in to a preset station You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. PRESET/BAND 02.5.13, 1:34 PM OPERATING OTHER COMPONENTS USING THE REMOTE CONTROL Setting the manufacturer code (remote control signal assigned to each manufacturer) for your TV, VCR or MD/ CD recorder on the remote control allows you to operate not only the DVX-S100 but also your TV, VCR or MD/ CD recorder using the remote control. Note 2 Keeping CODE SET pressed, enter the 1digit device code and the 2-digit manufacturer code for the component to be controlled using the numeric buttons. You can release CODE SET after entering the code. y • Depending on the model, certain components from other manufacturers cannot be controlled, or only limited functions can be controlled, even though the proper manufacturer code has been set. If you encounter this problem, please use the remote control supplied with the component. Setting the manufacturer code Manufacturer codes can be set for TV, VCR and MD/ CD-R buttons only. • TV manufacturer codes can be set for the TV button only. However, any of the manufacturer codes can be set for the VCR and MD/CD-R buttons. POWER TV TV POWER AV AV SLEEP TV MODE INPUT CH TUNER VOL MUTE MD CD–R MD/CD-R VCR VCR AUDIO SUBTITLE REC VIDEO 2 3 Press POWER (TV or AV) and check that the component to be controlled turns on and off (standby). Precautions when performing the setting You can operate the component using the TV, VCR or MD/CD-R operation buttons on the remote control once the manufacturer code is set properly. If unsuccessful, perform the procedure from step 1 again. Pay attention to the following points when you perform the procedure. • Check that the correct remote control selector button has been selected when setting the manufacturer code. • If more than one code is given for a manufacturer, try entering each code in the order given. • Remove and replace the remote control’s batteries (complete this step within 2 minutes) and then perform the procedure. While replacing the batteries, be sure not to press any button on the remote control. Doing so may erase the manufacturer code which has been set for other remote control selector buttons. VIDEO 1 CODE SET CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL 9 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH Numeric buttons PAGE MUTE ABCDE ENTER CH To reset the manufacturer code to the factory-set code REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Note • The manufacturer code 99 has been set for the remote control selector buttons (TV, VCR and MD/CD-R) at the factory. Follow steps 1 to 2 for the procedure “Setting the manufacturer code”, and enter the device code for the component and “99” while pressing CODE SET in step 2. (It is not necessary to follow step 3.) PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) 1 While pressing CODE SET, press the input selector button (TV, VCR, MD/CD-R) for which the manufacturer code is to be set. Only one manufacturer code can be set for each input selector button. Note • Keep pressing CODE SET between step 1 and 2. English • Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES” at the end of this manual. 57 OPERATING OTHER COMPONENTS USING THE REMOTE CONTROL ■ Table of control buttons When you press the input selector button for which a manufacturer code has been set, many buttons on the remote control function differently to operate each component as shown in the table below. 1 POWER 2 TV POWER AV SLEEP TV MODE 3 INPUT TUNER CH VOL MD MUTE CD–R AUDIO SUBTITLE When you press the TV button, the TV is automatically turned on. The AV components such as VCR are turned on when you press the AV button after pressing the corresponding input selector buttons. VCR REC 4 VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT HALL 5 JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL /DTS 9 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH ENTER 6 PAGE MUTE ABCDE CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL (U.S.A. model) Component VCR Control button 1 AV *1Power TV CD/MD recorder *3VCR power *1Power 2 TV * TV power TV power *2TV power 3 TV CH + *2TV channel up TV CH – 2 TV channel up *2TV channel up 2 TV channel down *2TV channel down 2 * TV channel down TV VOL + * TV volume up TV volume up *2TV volume up TV VOL – *2TV volume down TV volume down *2TV volume down TV MUTE * TV mute TV mute *2TV mute TV INPUT *2TV input TV input *2TV input 2 4 4 * REC Rec * VCR rec Rec (MD) w Play *3VCR play Play e Search backward *3VCR search backward Search backward 3 3 r Search forward * VCR search forward Search forward d Pause *3VCR pause Pause t – – Skip backward y – – Skip forward a Stop *3VCR stop Stop 5 1-9, 0, ≥10 – – Numeric buttons 6 CH + VCR channel up – – VCR channel down – – CH – *1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button. *2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in TV. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in input selector buttons (except TV). *4 Only when pressing this button twice in quick succession within one second, the button functions. y • If the manufacturer code of TV has been set for the TV button, the control buttons 2 and 3 can also operate your TV even if any input selector button is pressed. 58 SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. y • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. Adjusting the items on the SET MENU Adjustment should be made with the remote control. VIDEO 1 List of SET MENU items CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 CANCEL 9 TOP MENU LEVEL Items Initial settings u, d CH 1 GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET PAGE MUTE AMP DSP program buttons SET MENU ABCDE ENTER CH SPEAKER SET A CENTER B FRONT C REAR LR D BASS E F. Level SML (small) SMALL SML (small) SWFR Nrm (Normal) LFE LEVEL SP LFE HP LFE 0 dB 0 dB 3 SP DLY TIME 0 ms 4 D. RANGE SP D.R HP D.R MAX MAX 5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R y 6 HP TONE CTRL HP BASS HP TRBL 0 dB 0 dB 4 I/O ASSIGN [A] OPTICAL INPUT [B] COAXIAL INPUT VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R 8 INPUT MODE AUTO Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the front panel display. Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. 5 9 SP/PRE OUT SP Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu disappears or simply press one of the DSP program buttons to exit SET MENU. 2 In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the default setting is indicated in bold. TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL j, i (U.S.A. model) Note • Some items require extra steps. 1 2 3 Press AMP. Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. Press u/d repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust (1 to 9). ADJUSTMENTS 7 PRESET • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. English 59 SET MENU 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. If you do not use one or any of the included speakers, or if you use other speakers instead of the included speakers, set the following. Note • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, some items are not affected. ■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide better dialog localization for several listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. 60 ■ 1B FRONT (front speaker mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL LARGE Select this if you have large front speakers. The entire range of the front left and right channel signal is directed to the front left and right speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small front speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the front channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. Note • When you select FRONT for “1D BASS”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the front channel are directed to the front speakers even if you select SMALL for the front speaker mode. ■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the rear left and right speakers. SML Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you select NON for “1C REAR LR”. SET MENU ■ 1D BASS (LFE/bass out mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both front left and right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. FRONT Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the front speakers. BOTH The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Lowfrequency signals designated to the front channels in accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed to both front speakers and a subwoofer. 2 LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. Control range: SPEAKER (SP LFE) ............. –20 to 0 dB HEADPHONE (HP LFE) ............. –20 to 0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB 1 2 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted. Press j to adjust the LFE level. ADJUSTMENTS ■ 1E F. Level (front level mode) Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear (L/R) speakers with that of the front speakers because of unusually high-efficiency performance from the front speakers. Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB Nrm Select this if you can match the output level of the center and rear speakers with that of the front speakers when using the test tone. –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of the effect speakers with that of the front speakers when using the test tone. English 61 SET MENU 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speaker, with a source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the front speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the front left and right speaker to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. Control range: CENTER ............. 0 to 5 ms Initial setting: CENTER ............. 0 ms Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay of the center channel sounds. Center speaker image RL C Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital signals. Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum) MAX Select the “MAX” for feature films. STD Select the “STD” for general use. MIN Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. Note • Some types of the Dolby Digital software do not support “MIN” for the dynamic range. If “MIN” is selected to play this type of software, the volume may be extremely lowered fall greatly, sharply. If this happens, select “MAX” or “STD”. 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the front left and right speakers) Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the front left and right speakers. Control range: 20 steps each for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R C L 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) R RR Press i to decrease the output level for the front left speaker. Press j for the front right speaker. 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. Control range (dB): BASS ................... –6 to +3 TRBL (treble) ..... –6 to +3 Initial setting: BASS ................... 0 dB TRBL .................. 0 dB Press i to increase the level of the bass and treble, and press j to decrease the level. 62 SET MENU 7 I/O ASSIGN (input assignment) It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more components. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT H / G on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ [A] OPTICAL INPUT jack Choices: VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR, MD/CD-R ■ [B] COAXIAL INPUT jack Choices: VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR, MD/CD-R Note • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the digital input jacks when you turn on this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the respective source. 9 SP/PRE OUT (output source settings) Choices: SP, PRE PRE Select this to direct signals to 6CH PREOUT jacks or if you connect your external amplifier to 6CH PREOUT jacks on this unit. (No sound is output from the speakers connected to the subwoofer (SW-S100).) ADJUSTMENTS SP Select this to direct signals to the speakers connected to the subwoofer (SW-S100). (No sound is output from 6CH PREOUT jacks.) English 63 110_S100_59-66_EN 63 02.5.13, 1:35 PM ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, rear left and right, and subwoofer) while listening to a source. ■ For 5ch Stereo You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 5channel stereo mode. VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 CANCEL 9 LEVEL TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET AMP PAGE MUTE Control range: 0 to 100% Initial Setting: 100% • CT level (Center level) • RL level (Rear left level) • RR level (Rear right level) ABCDE u, d VIDEO 1 CH ENTER CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL j, i CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD AMP ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 CANCEL 9 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH (While playing a source) 1 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display as follows: center, rear right, rear left and subwoofer. y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d / u. Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or rear left and right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from +10 dB to –10 dB. Notes • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1D BASS” to FRONT, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps described in “Using the test tone” on page 20. 64 MUTE ENTER CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL j, i Press AMP. CENTER (Center speaker) ^ R SUR. (Rear right speaker) ^ L SUR.(Rear left speaker) ^ SWFR (Subwoofer) ^ CENTER (Center speaker)... 3 PAGE ABCDE u, d (U.S.A. model) AMP 4 (U.S.A. model) (While playing a source) 1 2 3 Press AMP. 4 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. Press “4” button to select 5ch Stereo. Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Notes • During the 5ch Stereo mode, the output level adjusted with the test tone or LEVEL is replaced with the level adjusted in the 5-channel stereo mode. • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C REAR LR” are set to NON, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. CHANGING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR DSP PROGRAMS The following table shows factory-set delay time. Adjusting the delay time Program You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the front speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. 1 CONCERT HALL 45 2 JAZZ CLUB 30 3 ROCK CONCERT 15 4 DISCO 26 GAME 36 CONCERT VIDEO 21 5 TV SPORTS 10 6 MONO MOVIE 69 7 70 mm SPECTACLE 23 DGTL SPECTACLE 15 DTS SPECTACLE 15 Spectacle 6.1 15 70 mm SCI-FI 20 Sci-Fi 6.1 15 DGTL SCI-FI 15 DTS SCI-FI 15 70 mm ADVENTURE 20 DGTL ADVENTURE 15 DTS ADVENTURE 15 Adventure 6.1 15 70 mm GENERAL 20 DGTL GENERAL 15 DTS GENERAL 15 General 6.1 15 PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 15 DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5 DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5 VIDEO 1 CODE SET CD SHIFT DVD HALL JAZZ ROCK AMP 2 3 4 SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 >–10 CANCEL 9 GROUP TOP MENU LEVEL MENU SET MENU PRESET DSP program buttons PAGE MUTE ABCDE u, d CH AMP ENTERTAINMENT 1 SPORTS ENTER CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN VOL j, i (While playing a source) 3 4 Press AMP. 8 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the delay time. Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the front panel display. Press j / i to adjust the delay time. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. 9 Matrix 6.1 5 PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20 DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5 DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5 Enhanced 6.1 5 PRO LOGIC II Movie 15 PRO LOGIC II Music 5 ADJUSTMENTS (U.S.A. model) 1 2 Preset value (ms) English 65 CHANGING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR DSP PROGRAMS Adjusting the parameter settings for PRO LOGIC II Music ■ Changing parameter settings You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC II Music parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. CD SHIFT DVD AMP ROCK ENTERTAINMENT HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SPORTS SETUP MONO MOVIE ANGLE MOVIE 1 MARKER MOVIE 2 5 /DTS 6 7 8 PLAY MODE SELECT REPEAT MATRIX 6.1 A–B STEREO 0 > –10 CANCEL 9 9, 0 TOP MENU LEVEL GROUP MENU SET MENU PRESET CH AMP Choices: ENTER DIMENSION PAGE Function: CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN B. BOOST RETURN Turning the function on extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. MUTE ABCDE u, d PANORAMA Function: VIDEO 1 CODE SET ■ PRO LOGIC II Music parameter descriptions VOL j, i Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). CT WIDTH (Center width) Function: (U.S.A. model) 1 2 Press AMP. 3 4 5 Press u / d to select the parameter. 66 Press the numeric buttons 9 and 0 repeatedly to select PRO LOGIC II Music. Press j / i to change the parameter value. Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to change other parameters. Adjusts the center image from the center and front speakers to varying degrees. The larger the value, adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are having is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or POWER ( )) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. — This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then start operating. — No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14 – 19 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selector buttons. 21 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 21 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 21 The source that this unit cannot reproduce, such as a CD-ROM, is being played. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The picture does not appear. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of video jacks (S VIDEO or VIDEO (composite)) for both the input and output. 14 The sound suddenly goes off. The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 22 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Sound can be heard only from the front speakers. The sound effect is off. Press STEREO to turn it on. 27 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 23 – 24 A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. When a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit, sound is output from the front speakers only. 17 – 18 APPENDIX 17 – 18 27 English 67 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound from the center speaker. Cause Remedy The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 64 “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 60 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected (except for 5ch Stereo). Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. Refer to page 23 – 24 — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with program 9. Select another DSP program. “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 61 “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or FRONT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 61 The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). 64 23 – 24 — Poor bass reproduction. The speaker mode settings (front, center, or rear) on the SET MENU do not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate position for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 60 – 61 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14 – 15 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (Rec) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the digital output jack of this unit. A source component is not connected to the digital input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the digital input jacks of this unit. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — — 68 111_S100_67-75_EN 68 — 02.5.13, 1:36 PM 14 – 15 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Disc playback Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page No response when buttons pressed. Some operations may be prohibited by the disc. Playback does not start. The disc is damaged. Check the disc carefully; replace it if necessary. — There is moisture on the laser pickup. Wait 1 to 2 hours after switching the unit on before trying to play a disc. — The disc has been loaded upside down. Reload the disc with the label side facing up. — The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. 30 Alternative languages fail to be selected. No subtitles. — An alternative language is not selected with discs which do not contain more than one language. — In the case of some discs, the alternative language cannot be selected with “Audio” or “Subtitle”. Try selecting it from the disc’s menu if one is available. — The disc does not have subtitles. Subtitle is turned off. — Show subtitles by pressing SUBTITLE or using on-screen menu. 35 The disc or the scene being played does not support multi-angle. — No sound. Distorted sound. If the “D.MIX” indicator on the front panel display goes out while playing a multichannel DVD-Audio disc, sound will only be output from speakers specified by the disc. — Sound “skips”. The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. 30 Noise from inside of the unit. The disc may be warped. Replace the disc. — Picture distorted during SEARCH. Some distortion is normal during SEARCH. — No picture. (U.S.A. and Canada models) If you play PAL system DVD-Audio, “This disc is PAL system. The output is sound only” may appear on the monitor. Picture is not available because the disc’s video signal system is different. — Picture appears incorrectly. Incorrect “TV aspect” setting. Select the right position. However, it may be difficult to adjust many DVD-Videos’ widescreen format to fit perfectly in your 4:3 video monitor. (U.S.A. and Canada models) PROGRESSIVE is turned on even though the connected monitor cannot receive the progressive signals. Turn off the PROGRESSIVE feature. 38 – 39 (U.S.A. and Canada models) Due to the editing method or material used on a DVD, ghosting may occur with progressive output. Turn off the PROGRESSIVE feature. 38 – 39 APPENDIX Angle cannot be changed. 48 English 69 111_S100_67-75_EN 69 02.5.13, 1:36 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page No on-screen display. Go to Display on the SETUP menu, and select “On” for “On-Screen Messages”. 49 On-Screen Menu Icons not displayed or only partially displayed on the television. Press the cursor buttons (u,d) while the rightmost icon is highlighted to change the menu bar position. 34 There is a lot of ghosting. Use the on-screen menu icons to adjust the picture quality. 37 “No Play” appears on the unit’s display. The disc that this unit cannot play is loaded. This unit does not recognize disc (“No disc” appears on the display, or the display shows the status when no disc is loaded). The disc is not placed properly. — Place the disc properly. 70 111_S100_67-75_EN 70 02.5.13, 1:37 PM — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem FM/ AM FM AM Cause Remedy Refer to page The preset stations are cleared. Pre-set the stations once again. 55 FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 16 Use the manual tuning method. 54 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. 16 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 16 Use the manual tuning method. 54 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 16 Use the manual tuning method. 54 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 16 There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — APPENDIX Previously preset stations cannot be tuned in. ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The manufacture code is not correctly set. Set the code correctly. 57 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. 57 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Operate the component using its remote control. — English 71 GLOSSARY Bitstream Dolby Pro Logic II This is the digital form of multiple channel audio data (eg., 5.1 channel) before it is decoded into its various channels. Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 front channels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels (instead of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. Decoder A decoder restores the coded signals on DVDs to normal. This is called decoding. Dolby Digital This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can also be 5.1-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can be recorded on one disc using this method. Dolby Pro Logic A surround system where a 4-channel audio track is recorded as 2 channels and then is restored to 4 channels for play. The surround channel is monaural and can reproduce up to 7 kHz. 72 DTS (Digital Theater Systems) This surround system is used in many movie theaters around the world. There is good separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are possible. Dynamic range Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest level of sound before distortion occurs. Film and video DVDs are recorded using either film or video. Film is recorded at 24 frames per second, the rate movies are filmed at, although some recent progressive material is recorded at 30 frames per second. Video is recorded at 30 frames per second. Frame still and field still A still is shown when you pause a moving picture. A frame still is made up of two alternating fields, so the picture may appear blurred, but overall quality is high. A field still is not blurred, but it has only half the information of a frame still so picture quality is lower. Frames are the still pictures that go together to make a moving picture. There are about 30 frames shown each second. One frame is made up of two fields. A regular television shows these fields one after the other to create frames. Group A DVD audio disc is divided into large sections called “groups” and smaller sections called “tracks”. The numbers allocated to these sections are called “group numbers” and “track numbers”. GLOSSARY Interlace and progressive output Matrix 6.1 NTSC, the video signal standard, has 525 interlaced (i) scan lines, whereas progressive scanning uses twice the number of scan lines. This is called 525p. The 525i video signals output from this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals (Y, PB / CB, PR/CR) allow you to enjoy higher quality pictures than if the signals were output from the video output terminal or S VIDEO OUT terminal. The COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals are also able to handle 525p (progressive) video signals which are of even greater resolution. The unit incorporates Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is created from rear left and right channels, and outputted from virtual rear center speaker.) With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-around” effects. I/P/B LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. Linear PCM (pulse code modulation) PCM is the usual digital method used for music CDs. DVDs have a greater volume so they use linear PCM, which has a higher sampling rate. Compressed PCM signals are called packed PCM (PPCM). In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they are viewed on a widescreen television with an aspect ratio of 16:9. This means you can view most material with the intended aspect ratio on a widescreen television. Material with this ratio will not fit onto a standard television with an aspect ratio of 4:3. Two styles of picture, “Pan&Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem. Pan&Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture fills the screen. Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and bottom of the picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9. Playback control (PBC) If a Video CD has “playback control” written on it or its jacket, it means that particular scenes or information can be selected for viewing interactively with the television using the menu screen. This unit can play Video CDs with playback control. Using menus to control play of a Video CD is called “menu play” in these operating instructions. APPENDIX MPEG, the video compression standard adopted for use with DVD-Video, codes frames using these 3 picture types. I: Intra coded picture (I-picture) This is the standard picture and is a complete picture in itself. This means it has the best picture quality and is the best to use when adjusting the picture. P: Predictive coded picture (P-picture) This picture is calculated based on past I or Ppictures. B: Bidirectionally-predictive coded picture (B-picture) This picture is calculated by comparing past and future I and P-pictures so it has the lowest volume of information. Pan&Scan/Letterbox Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. English 73 GLOSSARY SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed using headphones. S video signal With the S video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. Title/Chapter DVD-Video are divided up into large sections, titles, and smaller sections, chapters. The numbers allocated to these sections are called title numbers and chapter numbers. Track This is the smallest division on DVD-Audio, CD, and Video CD, and usually equates to a single song. Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without center or rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. 74 SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION SPEAKER SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power FRONT L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ........................................................ 33 W [U.S.A. and Canada models] 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ..................................... 25 W SUBWOOFER 100 Hz, 0.9% THD, 5 Ω ...................................................... 40 W • Front and Rear Speakers Model Name ................................................................. NX-S100S Type ................................................................... 2-way Bass reflex Speakers ............. 10 cm (4 inch) cone, 1.9 cm (3/4 inch) balanced dome, magnetically shielded Impedance ................................................................................ 6 Ω • Maximum Power (EIAJ) FRONT L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) ............................................................................................ 40 W SUBWOOFER (100 Hz, 10% THD, 5 Ω) ............................................................................................ 50 W • Center Speaker Model Name ................................................................. NX-S100C Type ................................................................... 2-way Bass reflex Speakers .............. 7 cm (3 inch) cone x 3, 1.5 cm (5/8 inch) piezo, magnetically shielded Impedance ................................................................................ 6 Ω • Total Harmonic Distortion FRONT L/R (20 W, 1 kHz) ................................................ 0.05 % • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network, shorted) .................... 95 dB • Input Sensitivity VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR, MD/CD-R .................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level (when 200 mV is input.) PRE OUT (FRONT L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R) ........... max. 1 V PRE OUT (SUBWOOFER) ............................................ max. 4 V REC OUT .............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ Headphones ............................................................ 165 mV/100 Ω VIDEO SECTION TUNER SECTION • FM Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .................................................. 87.5 to 108.0 MHz • AM Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 530 to 1710 kHz [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................. 531 to 1611 kHz [General model] ................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz [General model] ........................................... AC 220/240 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption DVR-S100 ............................................................................. 40 W SW-S100 .............................................................................. 160 W • Standby Power Consumption DVR-S100 [General model] .................................................................... 0.5 W [Other models] ...................................................................... 0.4 W APPENDIX • Video Signal Level Video .......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S Video (Y/C) [U.S.A., Canada and General models] .... 1 Vp-p/0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .......... 1 Vp-p/0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω Component (Y/PB, PR) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Australia models] .................................................................. 1 Vp-p/0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................ 50 dB • Subwoofer Model Name .................................................................... SW-S100 Type ........ Advanced YAMAHA Active Servo Technology system Speaker ............ 16 cm (6-1/2 inch) woofer, magnetically shielded • Laser pickup Wave length ........................................................................ 665 nm Laser power .................................................................... CLASS II Laser output ........................................ Max. 1.0 mW (Continuous) Output value determined by 21 CFR CHAPTER1, SUBCHAPTER J • Dimensions (W x H x D) DVR-S100 ....................................................... 435 x 84 x 360 mm (17-1/8” x 3-3/8” x 14-3/16”) SW-S100 ........................................................ 200 x 395 x 416 mm (7-7/8” x 15-1/2” x 16-3/8”) NX-S100C ....................................................... 440 x 85 x 122 mm (17-3/8” x 3-3/8” x 4-7/16”) NX-S100S ....................................................... 120 x 250 x 92 mm (4-3/4” x 9-7/8” x 3-5/8”) • Weight DVR-S100 ............................................................................. 6.0kg (13 lbs 4 oz) SW-S100 .............................................................................. 10.7kg (23 lbs 9 oz) NX-S100C ............................................................................. 1.7kg (3 lbs 12 oz) NX-S100S ............................................................................. 1.1kg (2 lbs 6 oz) • Usable temperature range .............................................. 5°C to 35°C • Usable humidity range .......................... 5% to 90% (There should be no condensation.) 75 111_S100_67-75_EN 75 02.5.13, 1:37 PM English • Accessories .............................................................. Refer to page 3. LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES Sony Sylvania Telefunken Thomson Toshiba Videch Wards TV (Device Code: 2) Yamaha Admiral Aiwa Akai Alba AOC BellÅïHowell Bestar Blaupunkt Blue sky Brandt Brocsonic Bush Clatronic Craig Croslex Curtis Mathis Daewoo Daytron Dual Emerson Ferguson First line Funai Fisher Fraba GE Goodmans Grundig Hitachi ICE Irradio Itt/Nokia JC Penny JVC Kendo KTV LG (Goldstar) Loewe LXI Magnavox Matsui Mitsubishi NEC Nokia Nokia Oceanic Nordmende Onwa Panasonic Philco Philips Pioneer Portland Quasar Radio Shack RCA SABA Samsung Sanyo Schneider Scott Sharp Siemens Signature I 99 92 94 95 96 97 92 98 29 98 23 97 96 98 24 25 97 97 39 98 97 23 98 77 95 98 93 96 29 97 96 96 44 93 96 98 97 97 98 93 97 95 99 97 44 45 65 96 34 97 25 26 97 34 99 93 23 97 95 96 97 92 29 92 92 93 76 96 63 97 69 23 92 97 97 25 64 65 66 66 26 67 42 39 32 VCR (Device Code: 3) 22 26 98 24 27 28 24 39 32 65 66 78 33 97 98 38 39 34 35 36 23 49 42 43 45 97 34 37 46 47 39 98 39 37 48 97 25 26 33 25 39 97 59 52 82 45 66 35 36 53 25 39 35 56 35 93 97 69 39 33 54 55 68 97 34 65 48 79 39 32 56 57 58 66 62 75 72 73 74 Yamaha Admiral Aiwa Akai Audio Dynamic BellÅïHowell Blaupunkt Brocsonic Bush Canon CGM Citizen Craig Curtis Mathis Daewoo DBX Dimensia Emerson Fisher Funai GE Goodmans Grundig Hitachi Instant Replay Itt/Nokia JC Penny JVC Kendo Kenwood LG (Goldstar) Loewe Luxor LXI Magnavox Marantz Marta Matsui Memorex Minolta Mitsubishi Multitech NEC Nokia Nokia Oceanic Okano Olympic Orion Panasonic Pentax Philco Philips Phonola Pioneer Quasar RCA/PROSCAN 99 95 96 22 92 93 25 27 22 25 96 96 96 97 28 92 33 27 93 97 28 34 32 25 25 93 92 92 96 92 96 96 95 93 25 92 96 96 28 33 99 97 92 93 95 23 25 27 25 33 25 25 37 25 25 25 92 93 94 97 98 29 23 24 94 26 28 32 28 33 34 35 94 34 36 88 33 37 38 33 49 42 43 28 93 94 28 33 49 94 44 45 46 47 94 96 37 96 97 36 49 26 28 94 36 49 44 48 59 52 53 48 54 94 44 83 95 28 28 39 55 78 84 85 49 28 26 28 37 56 57 28 26 28 33 35 49 58 69 Realistic Samsung Sansui Sanyo Schneider Scott Seleco Sharp Siemens Signature 2000 Sony Sylvania Symphonic Tandberg Tashiro Tatung Teac Technics Telefunken Thorn Toshiba Universum W.WHouse Wards 93 54 94 93 37 99 22 95 93 95 68 97 97 34 96 92 92 25 76 93 35 96 96 95 97 28 36 59 62 58 63 64 65 66 36 67 35 36 48 59 52 54 58 62 82 97 79 72 73 74 75 25 26 28 94 94 97 28 77 96 69 89 27 76 96 36 62 CDR (Device Code: 4) Yamaha Sony DENON JVC Kenwood Pioneer Marantz Philips Hitachi 99 27 22 23 25 22 26 22 22 24 MD (Device Code: 5) Yamaha Sony Denon JVC Kenwood Pioneer Sharp 99 98 22 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 II U DVD HOME THEATER SOUND SYSTEM DVX-S100 DVX-S100: DVR-S100 + NX-S100S + NX-S100C + SW-S100 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in 101_S100_H14(U)3.2mm 1 Malaysia OWNER’S MANUAL V883340-1 02.5.13, 2:11 PM-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
Yamaha NX-S100S Manual de usuario
- Categoría
- Reproductores de CD
- Tipo
- Manual de usuario
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha NX-S100S Manuel utilisateur
- italiano: Yamaha NX-S100S Manuale utente
- English: Yamaha NX-S100S User manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha NX-S100S Benutzerhandbuch
- русский: Yamaha NX-S100S Руководство пользователя
- Nederlands: Yamaha NX-S100S Handleiding
- português: Yamaha NX-S100S Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha NX-S100S Brugermanual
- polski: Yamaha NX-S100S Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha NX-S100S Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha NX-S100S Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha NX-S100S Kullanım kılavuzu
- română: Yamaha NX-S100S Manual de utilizare
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha DVD-S657 El manual del propietario
-
-
-
Yamaha AVXS80 Manual de usuario
-
-
-
-
-
-
Otros documentos
-
LG NE8421TNC El manual del propietario
-
-
Pioneer DVH-P5000MP Manual de usuario
-
Insignia NS-H3005 Manual de usuario
-
Boss Audio Systems BV7348B El manual del propietario
-
Samsung DVD-V6700 Manual de usuario
-
-
Aiwa XR-DV3M Manual de usuario
-
Sony CMT-L1 Manual de usuario
-
CyberHome DVR 1600 Manual de usuario
